高一英语模板一教案（精选多篇）

推荐第1篇：高一英语必修一unit3教案

Unit 3 Travel Journal Period1.

Step 1.Warming up 1.Ask some questions:

2.Do you often travel? Where have you been? 3.2.Following the steps of the warm-up on page 17. Step2.Pre-reading

1.Show some traveling pictures of the teacher’s.

2.Ask Ss : which river is the longest one in the world and which is the largest one; which river is the longest one in China. 3.Ask Ss: how people who live along a river use it. Step3.While-reading

1.Scanning: Ss read quickly and answer: What are they going to do?

2.Skimming: Ss read again and finish comprehending 1 on page 19. Ss read and get the main ideas of each paragraph.

Ss list the countries that the Mekong River flows through. Step4.After-reading

Ss in pairs and discu: Wang Wei’s and Wang Kun’s similar and different attitudes about the trip.

Similar attitudes about the trip Different attitudes about the trip Both Wang Wei and Wang Kun think…1.Taking this trip is a dream

come true.2.That they will enjoy this trip a lot.3.They should see a lot of the Mekong.4.That most of the Mekong will be found in Southeast Asia.Wang Wei believes…1.They must start in Qinghai where the river begins /see all of the Mekong.2.That they don’t need to prepare much Wang Kun believes…1.It is too cold and high to start in Qinghai.2.That using an atlas is very important. Step5.Aignment 1.Surf the internet and get more information about the Mekong River. 2.Retell the paage use your own words.

Period2.

Step1.Warming up

Ask some Ss to retell the paage that they have learnt last period.Step2.Learning about the language

Teacher explains some language points in the text on page 18.

1.Persuade sb.into /out of sth.: cause sb.(not) to do sth.by arguing or reasoning with him 说服或劝说某人（不）做某事

He is easily persuaded.

Wang Kun couldn’t persuade his sister to change her mind.

persuade sb.(that clause): cause sb.to believe sth.; convince sb.使某

人信服

How can I persuade you that I am telling the truth?

2.insist(v.): demand (sth) forcefully, not accepting a refusal 坚持或坚决要求； eg.Since he insisted, I had to stay.insist on sth/doing sth: require or demand ; refuse to accept an alternative 一定要（某事物），坚决主张

She insists on getting up early and playing her radio loud. 3.care about: be worried, concerned or interested 忧虑，关心，惦念 don’t you care about anybody? I don’t care about what happens to him.

care for /to do: be willing or agree to do sth.; wish or like to do sth. Would you care a drink? Would you care to go for a walk? care for sb. 1).Like or love sb. He cares for her deeply.

2).Look after sb; take care of sb; be responsible for sb Who will care for your child if you are out?

4.Once she has made up her mind, nothing can change it.她一旦下了决心，什么也不能使她改变。 once: adv. 1).for one time 一次

I have only been here once.2).at some time in the past 一度；曾经 He once lived in Zambia. 3).all at once: suddenly 突然

All at once the door opened. conj.= as soon as 一旦；一…就…

Once you understand this rule, you’ll have no further difficulty. Step 3.Practice

1.Ss finish Ex 1 and 2 on page 20 by themselves. 2.check the answer.3.Ss do Ex 3.on page 20.

4.Teacher gives Ss suggested answer and tell them why if the Ss have any problem. Step 4.Aignment

1.Learn the useful expreions by heart. 2.Finish Wb.Ex1 on page 56. 3.Finish Wb.Ex 2 on page 57.

Period 3.

Step1.Revision

Check the answers of Wb Ex 1 and 2 on page 56 and 57. Step2.Discovering useful structures

1.Ss look at the following sentences and underline the verbs. Are you working this evening?

We’re having an English party this weekend.He is leaving tomorrow.

Let Ss themselves find the rules and tell what tense they are used. 2.Ss finish the dialogue on page 21 and pay attention to the tense. Suggested answers:

are going, going, going/traveling, staying, are coming, coming, are going, 3.Ss finish part 3 on page 21.Step3.Talking

1.Ss four in one group and have a discuion about the topic on page 55. 2.Ss make a list about the objects: which is the most useful and which is the least useful and why.

2.the most useful objects the least useful objects 3.Ss show their result to the cla. Step4.Speaking 1.Ss work in pairs and discu: what do you think a dam does to a river and the people who live on it?

2.Make a list of some good and bad things a dam does.

3.Discu your report with your clamates and then show it in cla. Step5.Aignment

Finish Wb Ex 1 using structures on page 57.

Period4.

Step1.Warming up

Ask Ss some questions about Journey Down The Mekong (I). 1.What was Wang Kun and Wang Wei’s dream? 2.What can they see when they travel along the Mekong? 3.Will they have some difficulties in their journey? What are they? Step2.Reading

1.Ss read the paage: a night in the mountains and answer the following questions:

How does Wang Kun feel about the trip now? What do you think has changed his attitude?

2.Ss make a dialogue about things happen the next morning before Wang Kun and Wang Wei leave their camp. 3.show the dialogue to the cla.

Step3.Reading

1.Ss read the paage: The End Of Our Journey on page 59 2.Ss fill in the form with the information from the travel journal. Topic Laos Cambodia Vietnam Population Weather Learning Farming

Period5.(Writing) Step1.Pre-writing 1.Ss read the paage and get the general idea about it.

2.Ss make a list of details from the travel journal that you believe are real and you don’t believe are real.Step2.While-writing

1.Ss write a short letter to Wang Wei as one of her friend and ask her to describe: how she feels, what she is doing, and some place you want to know about.Then wish her well on her journey by using some of the following expreions:

Have a nice/good time. Have a nice/good trip. Good luck on your journey. Say “Hello” to …

Give my love/best wishes to… Have fun. Take care. Write to me.

2.Ss read their writing and check the mistakes by themselves. Ss exchange their writing and correct the mistakes. Ss rewrite the letter again. Step3.After-writing Choose some samples and show them in cla.Tips on writing:

Pay attention to the form of writing a letter. Pay attention to the tense while writing. Pay attention to the structures of the sentences. Step4.Aignment

Ss in group 3-5, make an advertisement or finish the project on page 61.

推荐第2篇：高一英语必修一UNIT5教案

篇1：高一英语必修一unit5教学设计

教材分析

我教的是高一年级上册，人教版，必修1， unit5, nelson mandela---a modern hero 的第一课，这是一节高中阅读课。

教材上这一部分主要分为四个部分：

由于第

一、二部分联系比较紧密，活动设置也比较好，但我觉得这两部分的活动顺序可以调整一下，即把第二部分放在前面，先呈现图片和简介以引起学生注意力和兴趣，以图片展示的形式激励学生用英语进行语言实践活动，然后归纳出hero的一个模糊标准，为阅读活动做好铺垫。然后再让他们自己说出他们所认为的a great person 所拥有的品质，这样可能更符合学生的思维习惯特点，并且有利于调动他们的积极性和培养他们说语言的能力。

因此，我决定吧第

一、二部分结合在一起作为pre-reading 部分来讲，但顺序做一下调整，之后是正式人物曼德拉的登场，进入主题alias眼中的曼德拉，重点把nelson mandela 挑出来，附加更多关于他的信息，稍加重点地呈现，因为他的信息与接下来的reading paage 联系非常紧密，我想通过重点呈现关于他的信息来提高给学生更多background information， 帮助他们更好地理解reading text. 第三部分是一个关于elias’ story 的reading text，属于人物传记式的阅读，但是文章的写作角度比较特别，由穷苦的黑人工人alias叙述他眼中的曼德拉，这样的写法比较客观可信。alias的故事与遭遇同时也成为本文与本课的一条贯穿总线,也是这堂课的中心阅读任务。学生要做的主要活动就是阅读并理解文章的内容和大意，同时注意一些重点细节信息的把握。

另外，在时间允许的情况下，我还想做一些扩展性的教学活动，比如让学生复述alias的经历，即达到检测学生的理解又能挑战学生说英语的能力。 the background of students: (1) the supporting background information should be given to students before reading to get them ready and not feel difficult. (2) the teaching procedures and reading task should be designed adaptive to students’ current ability and their cognitive style. (3) teacher should give students neceary guidance on reading strategies (4) teacher should be amiable and patient to make students le nervous. correctly to encourage them and improve their confidence. teaching plan for s1 a reading leon (leon 1, unit 5, 必修1)nelson mandela---a modern hero name: 颜巧云 cla: english 07(4) group: 4-1 teaching/learning objectives 4.develop reading skills: skimming, scanning and generalizing the central meaning of the text teaching procedures: stage1.pre-reading (5-10 minutes) do you think he is a great man? step2.gue game for prediction (present pictures of 6 famous persons both in nelson mandela. step2.check ’ understanding of the main idea of each paragraph through matching. step2.guide to finish t/f exercises and give their reasons to check ’ understanding of specific information. information and train their independent thinking and judgment, and help to enhance their ability to organize their ideas logically. people equal? e.g.1940: born 1946: six, educated, 2 years 1948: leave school, could not pay fee „„„. stage3.post-reading (10-15 minutes) step2.listen to the tape and read the quotes from nelson mandela to help feel the paion and the firm faith of the great man. step3.guide to summarize and explore the implied meaning of the text---a great man need not to be famous, he / she must have some good qualities and devote themselves to helping others. (1) try to summarize the language points by themselves part of verbatim plan for leon1, unit5, s1a, 必修1 -----nelson mandela- a modern hero t: (after greeting ) : (some may give their opinions) t: do you think he is a great man? : yes/no. : yes/ no. : (get into brainstorming)„

t: ok, cla, have you finished it? : yes. 篇2：人教版高中英语必修一 unit 5教案 unit 5 nelson mandela——a modern hero 教材分析：本单元以 nelson mandela —— a modern hero 为话题，目的在于使学生了解一个伟大的人应具备怎样的品质，学会表达自己的观点，并用所学的句型来描写一个伟人。

提示：

教学中要注意这种人称的前后一致，否则无法前后一致的引导学生进行学习和表达。

3、如何激发学生学习关于这些伟人的文章，是需要教师思考的：这些伟人学生会感兴趣吗？

学生了解多少关于这几位伟人的伟大业绩？从哪些角度来导入会让学生更加的感兴趣？

4、教学目标建议增加：通过学习文章和相关素材，进一步了解伟人的生平事迹，尤其是如何

才能成为伟人。培养学生初步使用相关词汇、句型和文章结构进行人物生平描述的口语表达和基础写作能力。 teaching aims: 1.to arouse ’ interest in learning about heroes in history 2.to develop ’ listening and speaking ability. teaching procedures: ? describe yourselves ? discuion (encourage students to give five or six qualities that they think great ? conclusion: step2 language points: 1． devote vt oneself to 献身于、致力于。。。

devote one’s life/one’s time to„.把生命、时间献给。。。

„to „把。。。用于。。。

devoted adj 忠实的, 深爱的

be devoted to 对„忠实, 对„深爱 a devoted friend she is devoted to her husband. 即学即练

the manager devotes all his spare time ______ the violin.b a.to practise b.to practisingc.in practising d.for practising 2.fight for 为„„而战

fight against 与„„作斗争；与„作战 3.give up 表示主动放弃或屈服

e.g.he has decided to give up smoking. give in 表示被动屈服或认输， 后面不带宾语。如果接宾语用give in to the second period-----extensive reading teaching aims: step1 make prediction: part 1(para.1---2) the life of elias’ before he met nelson mandela step 3 skimming: step 4 1.go over the “reading” and find out the useful expreions in it. the third period----intensive reading language points: give sb.advice on„关于„给某人建议 advise v. 1) advise sb.on/ about sth.就„„给某人出主意 e.g.i have advised you on that subject. 2) advise sb.to do sth.建议某人干„„

e.g.our monitor advises me to practice more spoken english. 3)advise doing sth建议做某事 4) advise that + (should) do e.g.i advise that you (should) not eat fruit that isn’t ripe. a.advisedb.hoped c.persuadedd.suggested 提示：

这种“即学即练”对于学生来说能锻炼什么呢？我觉得还是练习阅读理解的，不是练习词义选择的。另外，这部分刚刚讲解的advice，学生从最普通的逻辑推理也会知道此练习题是要训练advice的。再者，从词义和语境的搭配角度来看，hoped、persuaded和suggested都可以的，只是语法不对而已，这种单纯的考查词汇搭配记忆的题目，在目前的高考试题中，以及将来的高考试题中，都已经和应该被抛弃的。 out of „常有“出于，由于， 缺乏， 没有；放弃，丧失；越出。。。之外”等意义。 即学即练

.(08高考) a a.out of sight b.out of reach c.out of order d.out of place 提示：

个人觉得这种给出高考真题的练习题的方式不是最好，建议给出更多的几句例句，通过学生阅读理解句子的方式来锻炼理解短语在新语境中意思的能力。

篇3：高一英语必修1 unit5教案 unit 5 nelson mandela – a modern hero

一、单元教学目标和要求(teaching aims and demands)

二、教材内容分析（analysis of the teaching materials）

三、教学安排(teaching arrangements)

五、教学步骤 (teaching procedures)

七、评价与反思(aement and reflection) 临海市回浦中学 李珊珊 陈晓平余晶晶

一、教学目标和要求(teaching aims and demands) 根据课程标准实验教材（英语 必修）关于总目标的具体描述，结合高一学生实际和教材内容，我们将教学目标分为语言知识、语言技能、学习策略、情感态度和价值观四个方面。

词汇（vocabulary）：

功能(functions)：学习掌握一些用于发表意见与评论的结构句式，如： 1． 发表意见 （giving opinions）

agree / don't agree．i think / don't think ....i prefer ....in my opinion ....i'm afraid .... good idea! that's an excellent idea．

定语从句）

扩展词汇：

2.语言技能 (skills) 听：在本单元的课文及练习册听力教学中， 能听懂人物和事件以及它们的关系，能抓住所听语段中的关键词，正确理解话语间的逻辑关系。

说：在本单元的课文及练习讨论时， 能恰当使用i think/ i don’t think/ in my opinion/that’s an excellent idea等对英雄、伟人的品质恰当地发表意见，进行讨论。

写：能用恰当的语言简单地描述人物，并简单地表达自己的意见。 3.学习策略(strategy)：

1． 在听和读的训练中，学会借助情景和上下文猜测词义或推测段落大意，借助图表等

非语言信息进行理解和表达。

2． 主动制定本单元学习计划，客观评价自己的学习效果，在课内外活动中积极用英语 4.情感态度和价值观（affect and values）

了解nelson mandela的生平事迹，认识伟人所应具备的优秀品质，并向他们学习，以提高自身素质，树立正确的人生观，学习他们在艰苦的环境下为人类做贡献、不追求享乐的高尚精神。同时也学会一分为二的态度客观看待事物。

二、教材内容分析（analysis of the teaching materials）

三、教学安排(teaching arrangements) period 1: reading i (elias’ story +the rest of elias’ story) period 4: language practicing (grammar) 本教学安排根据“lara教学原则”，对教材进行大胆的删除（l – leave out）、修补（a – amending）、替换（r – replace）、增添（a – add），灵活的将教材为我所用。新教材在选材和教学活动的设计上充分考虑到学生年龄特征和他们生理和心理发展的需要；在采用话题、功能、结构相结合的教学方法的基础上，设计了“任务型”的活动；对英语语言知识和技能训练作了系统的安排，循序渐进，循环反复，有利于学生构建知识系统；注意培养创新精神，提高实践能力。但新教材也应与学生的实际相结合，我们不能全盘照搬。同时在教学过程中，为了对教学有及时的反馈和有效的改进，我们还进行了“形成性评价”,体现了学生的主体地位。

根据本单元的教材的特点，按照任务型教学与大容量输入与输出的教学理念，整个单元的设计思路如下：输入“英雄”的概念，先是学生的自由讨论，更通过曼德拉的事迹向学生展示何为当代伟人，以及伟人所要具备的一些品质。在这基础上，第二步要学生辨别伟人与名人的不同，以及体会一分为二的辩证唯物主义。最后我们回到生活中，生活中也有不少平凡但是为了集体崇高的理想，放弃个人利益而不断努力克服困难的普通民众，他们也是我们心目中的英雄，伟人。由此我们从书本回归到生活，也成功升华，延伸了英雄的概念。通过学习语言点、语法还有写作，学生在内化吸收了知识后，进行了输出。

篇4：人教版英语必修一unit5教案 teaching plan of unit 5 teaching aims: 1.topic the qualities of a great person; the lives of some great people. right(n.)criminal leader president sentence(v.) sincerely 3.functional items: a.giving opinions: i agree/ don’t agree. i think/don’t think„. i prefer„. in my opinion„. i’m afraid„ good idea! that’s an excellent idea. 4.structures the attributive clause (ii)

推荐第3篇：高一英语必修一Unit2leon1教案

Unit2 heroes

Leon1 modern heroes

Ⅰ.Background information

Chinese people have been dreaming of flying into space .This dream is realized in modern China with the development of scientific technology and economic ability .The first one is therefore become the modern hero.

Ⅱ.Teaching objective

By the end of the leon students should be able to:

1.Say and write the new words learned in the text.

2.Describe the proce of landing the moon of Yang Liwei in both spoken and written way.Proficiently using the words that go together.

3.Make up interview between Yang Liwei and reporter using the Past simple and Past continuous.

4.Learn to be brave to say English and ask questions in English.

5.Know some commonsense about manned spaceship in China and foreign countries.Ⅲ.Teaching contents:

Vocabulary of manned spaceship

The use of time linkers, especially adverbs and conjunctions

To revise the use of Past Simple and Past Continuous

Ⅳ.Teaching aids: blackboard, chalk, PPT, pictures

Ⅴ.Type of leon: vocabulary, grammar, speaking

Ⅵ.Teaching procedures:

Step1.Warming up

a) Ask questions to know what the students think of modern heroes.

b) Introduce the spaceship situation in the world through pictures and words.Step2.Reading

a) Ask and answer questions before reading.

b) Read the text and finish exercise3,4, 5 in the textbook.(pager22) c) Find the sentence of Past simple and Past continuous.

Step3.Explaining the text

a) Teach new words

b) Explaining the text

c) Do exercise 6,7

d) Free talk: Why do you think Yang Liwei is a hero?

What can we learn from him?

Step5.Grammar

a) Guide student to study Grammar Summary 3, on page 92.

b) Do the exercise 8,9,10

Step6.Make up an interview: do exercise 11

Step7.Homework:

a) Read the article space heroes on page 32

b) Writing: How is a spaceship launched?

推荐第4篇：高一英语必修必修一unit1教案

Unit

1Addv.增加

1.He added some wood to increase the fire.他加了一些木柴，使火旺些。

2.If you add 4 to 5, you get 9.四加五等于九。

3.Add up all the money I owe you.把我应付你的钱都加在一起。

add upadd up toadd… to…add to

Upseta.烦乱的,不高兴v.颠覆,推翻,扰乱,使心烦意乱,使不舒服

1.He has an upset stomach.他胃不舒服。

2.The news quite upset him.这消息使他心烦意乱。

Ignorev.不顾,不理,忽视

1.I said hello to her, but she ignored me completely! 我向她打招呼, 可她根本不理我!

2.I can\'t ignore his rudene any longer.他粗暴无礼, 我再也不能不闻不问了。

Calmn.平稳,风平浪静a.平静的,冷静的v.平静下来,镇静

1.It was a beautiful morning, calm and serene.那是一个宁静、明媚的早晨。

2.You should keep calm even in face of danger.即使面临危险，你也应当保持镇静。

3.Have a brandy it\'ll help to calm you (down).来点儿白兰地--能使你静下来。

calm downvt.平静下来(镇定下来)

1.His rage was soon calmed down by the rustic peace.乡村的宁静很快就使他的怒气平静下来。

2.I told myself to calm down.我告诫自己要冷静下来。

have got toconj.不得不(必须)

1.You may not like him, but you have got to admire his persistence.

你可以不喜欢他，但你不得不佩服他那种坚忍不拔的精神。

2.I couldn\'t have got to the meeting on time -- unle I had caught an earlier train.

我不可能及时赶到会场，除非我赶上了较找的一班火车。

Concernn.关心,关系, 关切的事,忧虑v.涉及,与...有关,影响;使关心

1.How much money I earn is none of your concern.我挣多少钱与你无关。

2.These problems concern all of us.这些问题影响到我们每一个人。

3.This restaurant is a family concern.这家饭店是由一家人经营的。

be concerned about/withvt.关心(挂念)

1.It is reauring to be enquired after when you\'re ill.It shows your friends haven\'t stopped being concerned about you.如果能询问一下你是何时生病的我们也就放心了。因为你的朋友一直在关心你。

2.The government\'s claim to be concerned about unemployment is sheer hypocrisy.

政府声称对失业表示关注纯属做做姿态。

3.Children should be taught to share their toys.应该教育孩子们分享玩具。

as / so far as … be concerned关于；至于；就……而言

go througha.通过

1.I\'ve gone through the elbows of my sweater.我的毛衣的肘部都磨破了。

2.He\'s amazingly cheerful considering all that he\'s been through.鉴于他经历过的种种遭遇，他的乐天达观令人惊叹。go after追求，追赶go ahead前进；请说（做）吧

go by走过，（时间）过去 go along with向前，（与……）一起去

go in for爱好，从事go out外出；（灯，火）熄灭

go over越过；复习go up爬上，（价格等）上升

set down1太阳落山2.申斥(搭乘,触地)飞机着陆3.写下来

set upset offset out

1.The bus stopped to set down an old lady.公共汽车停下来让一个老太太下车。

2.I\'ll set you down on the corner of your street.我在你说的那条街的拐角处停下来让你下车。

3.Why don\'t you set your ideas down on paper?你怎么不把你的想法写在纸上呢?

a series of一系列,一连串

1.The theory is based on a series of wrong aumptions.这一理论是以一系列错误的设想为依据的。

on purpose故意,有意on purposeby accident/ chance

1.He knocked the old man down on purpose.他故意把那个老人撞倒。

in order to 为了

in order that… 以便……（后跟句子） so that…以便……（后跟句子）

so as to为了……（只能置于句中，不能置于句首）

1． 他早早动身好按时到达。

He left early in order to/so as to/in order that/so that he should/would/might arrive on time.

at dusk 在黄昏时刻

at dawnat midnightat noon

thundern.雷电,雷声v.打雷,大声喊出

1.My little dog always hides under the bed when it thunders.我的小狗一听到打雷就藏到床底下。

2.We could hear the thunder of distant guns.我们可以听到远处炮声隆隆。

3.\"Get out!\" he thundered.“滚出去！”他大声吼到。

face to face面对面地shoulder to shoulderside by sidehand in hand

1.His ambition was to meet his favourite pop star face to face.

他心向往之的是要面对面地见见他心目中的流行曲歌星。

2.The burglar turned the corner and found himself face to face with a policeman.

盗贼一拐弯面对面地碰上个警察。

3.The two rival politicians came/were brought face to face in a TV interview.

那两个对立的政客面对面地一起接受电视访问。

no longernot … any longer 不再no morenot…any more

settle vt.安家；定居；停留 vt.使定居，安家；解决

1).He settled his child in a corner of the compartment.他把孩子安顿在车厢的一个角落里。

2).The family has settled in Canada.这家人已定居加拿大

settle down 镇定下来settle in 在…定居

Suffersuffer from

v.遭受,经验,忍受

1.They suffered huge loes in the financial crisis.他们在经济危机时遭受了巨大的损失。

2.She couldn\'t suffer criticism.她受不了批评。

recover from 痊愈，恢复

get/ be tired of

pack… up 将（东西）装箱打包

get along with

vt.友好相处(和睦相处,取得进展)

1.We should let bygones be bygones and try to get along with each other.

我们应当本着既往不咎的原则重新合伙。

2.He is the last person that I\'ll get along with.他是我最不愿与之相处的人。

3.Do you get along with your bo?/Do you and your bo get along? 你跟老板合得来吗?

get along/on well/ nicely/ badly with 与……相处得好/不好，……进展顺利/不顺利

get away离开，逃离

get down to (doing)开始认真干……

get through通过，做完

goip

n.闲聊,随笔

v.说闲话

get down下来；写下，取下 get over克服，摆脱get together聚集

1.There has been much goip in political circles.政界里有许多流言蜚语。

2.I never talk about goip.我从不传播流言蜚语。

3.She loves to goip to her neighbors.她喜欢议论邻居们的是非长短。

fall in lovebe in love

vt.陷入爱河(爱上,喜爱)

1.It is natural that he should fall in love with such a beautiful girl.他爱上那位美丽的姑娘是很自然的事。

disagree vt.不同意

1).Even friends sometimes disagree with each other.即便是朋友也有时意见不一。

2).We disagreed on future plans.我们对未来的计划产生了分歧。

disagree with sb/what sb says/sb\'s decision 不同意某人的观点[某人的话/某人的决定]

be grateful to sb.for sth.因某事感谢某人

join in

参加,加入

1.We want to join in the masquerade.我们想去参加化装舞会。

2.Can I join in (the game)? 我参加（这个游戏）行吗?

3.I will join in the project, heart and hand.我会满腔热情地参加这项工程。

辨析：join, join in, take part in, attend

join，join in，

join的基本词义是“加入某个党派或社会团体，从而成为该党派或团体的一员”。例：

When did they join the conservation organization？他们是什么时候参加环保组织的？

join in的意思是“参加某项运动或活动”，例如参加讨论、游行、罢工等。例：

More than ten thousand workers have joined in this strike．有一万多名工人参加了此次罢工。

There were many extracurricular activities，but Peter never joined in．尽管有很多课外活动，但彼德从不参加。 join表示参加组织、党派、团体、军队、俱乐部等

join in表示参加游戏、活动等；join sb.(in sth.) 表（和某人一起）做某事

take part in表示参与、参加讨论、游行、比赛、战斗、斗争、运动、庆祝等

attend

主要指出席、参加会议、婚礼；听讲座、课、报告、音乐会等；上学、教堂

句型：

1) It was the first time in a year and a half that I had seen the night face to face.（从句时态用完成时）

这是我一年半以来第一次目睹夜晚。

2) I wonder if it’s because I haven’t been able to be outdoors for so long that I’ve grown so crazy about everything to do with

nature.（强调句）

我不知道这是不是因为我长久无法出门的缘故，我变得对一切与大自然有关的事物都无比狂热。

3) I stayed awake on purpose until half past eleven one evening in order to have a good look at the moon for once by myself.有一天晚上，我熬到11点半故意不睡觉，为的是独自好好看看月亮一次。

4) Your friend, who doesn’t work hard, asks you to help him cheat in the end-of-term exam.（非限制性定语从句） 你的一

个朋友叫你在期末考试中帮他作弊，这个朋友平常不认真学习。

5) If you have some trouble (in) getting along with your friends, you can write to the editor and ask for advice.

如果你在和朋友的相处上有问题，你可以写信给编辑向他征求建议。

6) Add up your score and see how many points you can get.把你的得分加起来，看看得了多少。

7) What he did has added to our difficulties.他的所作所为增加了我们的困难。

8) His income adds up to $1000 a month.他每月的收入共计1000美元。

9) It\'s no pleasure looking through these any longer because nature is one thing that really must be experienced.观看这些已不

再是乐趣，因为大自然是你必须体验的。

10) Why is she so concerned about his attitude to her work? 她为什么那么关注他对她的工作的看法？

11) The police asked him to set down what he had seen in a report.警察让他在报告中写下他所看见的事情。

12) As I was about to go out and search for him, he happened to come in.正当我打算出去找他时，他恰巧进来。

13) Mr.Jones lives alone and often feels lonely.琼斯先生单独一人生活，常常感到孤独。

14) We tried to calm him down, but he kept crying.我们试图让他平静下来，但他仍不停地哭着。

15) Does he dare (to) go out at night in such stormy weather? 他敢在这样一个暴风雨夜外出吗？

16) He would go through fire and water for his country.他愿为国家赴汤蹈火。

17) That country suffered a heavy lo in the flood.那个国家在水灾中遭受严重的损失。

have something/ anything/ everything /nothingto do with

dare+(to)do(实义动词)

do(情态动词)

a year and a half

it’s no pleasure+ doing sth

happen to do sth

have trouble with sb(in)doing sth

find it + adj.+ to do sth

make friends with

it is / was + 序数词 + that+ has done / had done….

推荐第5篇：(一)高一英语教学计划教学计划

2013/2014(一)高一英语教学计划

高一（15）（16）班陈雪婷

新学期，我将担任高一（15）（16）两个普通班的英语老师。面对新的面孔，我充满了期待和热情。本学期，学习的时间短，教学任务重，而这两个班学生的学习基础差，既要抓好初高中衔接的内容建立学生学习的自信和提高学生的学习兴趣，又要抓好教学进度，跟进高一教学的内容，可以说困难重重。然而学生的学习积极性高，针对以上特点，制定本学期英语教学计划如下：

一、普及英语基础知识，重点训练基本句型

由于学生的基础薄弱，甚至对于单词的拼读都无从下手，因此有必要有计划的为学生普及基础的知识，关键是音标，利用音标提高词汇记忆效率，基本词汇掌握的不扎实，对英语的重点句型掌握。为了解决以上的问题，我们每周进行一次基本词汇，重点句型和重点语法的随堂检测，每天课前五分钟采用灵活多样的方法进行听写检查，主要是采用在具体的语境中练习单词拼写的方法，先从最基本的词汇抓起，逐步过渡到句型、小短文的默写检查上。

二、最大限度地提高课堂教学效率，发挥学生的学习积极性和主动性

在上每一节课前，都要先总结前一堂课的教学情况，认真研究教材和教法以及学生的学情，在课堂上最大限度的调动学生的学习积极性和主动性。设计简单一些的问题，逐步引导学生思考，精讲重点词汇、短语及句式，多创设语言情境让学生讨论，对学生进行分组分层教学，设计不同难度的问题与练习，让每个学生都能体验到英语学习的快乐与成功感。

三、以书面表达为主线，提升学生的书面表达能力

书面表达是提高英语学习信心的有效途径，我们在上好阅读课的同时，选取适合学生阅读水平的阅读材料，并且每天进行一次翻译训练，并跟上检查批改。此外每周要开展作文训练，内容根据高考大纲中的24个话题，增加练习形式多样性。

四、加强听力训练，注重听力技巧的点拨

虽然广东的高考取消了听力考试，但是新增加的15分听说考试对于听力的能力要求很高，必须让学生在高一就进行听力训练，提高整体的能力。们将利用好听力材料，对学生的听力进行强化训练，同时，多指导做题技巧，听力放完后学生把做错的题目汇总，自查并反复阅读听力原文，找出错题原因，然后老师利用合适的时间进行指导，点拨。尤其是在高一最初播放听力的几周时间里，教师要多指导。

五、组织好集体备课，加强相互听课评课，取长补短，共同进步

认真组织好集体备课，最大限度地发挥集体智慧的力量，对教学的重点难点进行讨论，并由主备老师上示范课，其他老师听课并一起评课，对不足之处进行修改，补充，通过相互听课学习，加强教学和指导的针对性，发挥备课组骨干教师的示范作用，同时学习新教师的一些好的教学方法，做到取人之长，补己之短，使整个备课组成员共同成长。

六、换一种独特的方法批改英语作文

我们本学期将一改过去传统的批改作文的方法，采用划出学生作文中正确句子的方法来批改，每次只划出正确的和精彩的句子，并重点标注。这样几乎每个学生都能够写对一个或几个句子，这样做的好处是学生会逐渐由写好几个句子提高到写好大多数句子，也能使学生对写作有成功感。然后我们把学生作文中的好句子进行积累，整合，并印发给学生共同赏析。而不是象原来那样，整篇文章中都是刺眼的错误，学生一看就感觉差距太大，不想继续练了。

总之，在新的学期里，我们高一英语备课组在学校领导的正确领导下，一定群策群力，团结一致，相互学习，共同进步，争取把学生的英语成绩逐步提上去！

推荐第6篇：外研社高一英语必修一教案(精)

Module One My first day at Senior high Period One Teaching content aSelf-introduction bVocabulary and speaking cEveryday English and function Teaching aims and demands a have the students to introduce themselves b have the students to know what you except from them c have the students get familiar with some words of subjects d have the students to learn the Everyday English and function Teaching methods a speaking bdiscuing cpair-work& group-work Teaching steps Step1 Self-introduction (I This is the first English cla in Senior high, you are fresh to the students , so are the students.So it is neceary for you to introduce yourself to the students and get them to introduce them to you and other students , you must stre that the students must introduce them in English.If neceary, you can make an example first.eg : My name is Liyingxu , I am your new English teacher ,you can call me Mr.li.I was born on April 16th in a small village in Hebei province.I graduated from Northwest

Minorities University , I have taught English in this school for three years.I am a friendly teacher , I am usually ready to help everyone of you.I like sports very much ,but I am not good at it.I don’t like music so much ,especially pop music, in my opinion, it is so noisy and meaningle.In my spare time, I like reading.I hope we can get along well with each other and I will try my best to teach you how to learn English well more than the grammar & vocabulary & drills.I will be strict with every student, so you must follow my words, or you will be punished.(some drills needed to be written on the black board a My name is …… b I am a …… c I was born on/in …… d I graduated from ……

e I like/ am good at / am fond of …… f I hope/ think/ want …… g ……

(II Get the students to introduce them to their partners in group of four, then ask some volunteers to introduce them to all the students in English.or Ask them to introduce them one by one.Step2 Vocabulary and speaking (I Vocabulary

Ask the students to tell you what subjects they learned in Junior High school and what other subjects they will learn in Senior High school, ask the students to expre them in English as poible as they can, then write the words on the Bb, teach the students to pronounce the words they don’t know.

eg : Chinese English Mathematics Physics Chemistry Biology Politics History Geography Arts Music IT (Information Technology PE(Physical Education GT(General Technology Japanese Ruian French (IIDialogue (pair-work T: How many subjects are science subjects? S: ……

T: How many of them are languages? S: ……

T: Which languages do you study at our school? S: .…..

T: Which subjects do you like best? Why? S: ……

Ask the students to imitate the dialogue to get which subject their partner like and why by using the following drills.Which subject do you like best? Why? Which subject do you like better between ...and …? Why? I like … because …

I think … is important because … I would like to study/learn … because … In my opinion … is … so I …..

Ask some of them to show their dialogues to the .Step 3 Everyday English and Function (I T: After we have talked about the favorite subjects you like best, now lets turn to another part.Every day when we have a break between claes we may meet some old friends, you may talk about your claes , now please turn to P8 , let’s learn the dialogue in Everyday English and Function .Ask the students to listen to the tape ,then to read the dialogue in pairs.(explain some difficult words and teach ask them to pronounce them by looking up them in the dictionary Ask the students to read and analyze these sentences.1 How are you doing? 2 Oh really? 3 Is that right? (II Work in pairs.Make a conversation about one of your claes .Use the conversation in activity 1 to help.Ask some of them to report and act their dialogue out.Step4 Summary The teacher summary the whole cla for the students and tell them what they should do to improve .Homework

I Review the drills we learned in this cla.II Preview Reading and vocabulary & Cultural corner.Period 2 Teaching content a Reading and vocabulary b Cultural corner Teaching aims and demands a get the students to understand the texts well b get the students to know the school life in other schools ( at home and in the USA c help the students to improve their reading ability Teaching methods a speaking b reading c discuing d pair-work& group-work Teaching steps Step 1 Revision I Revise last cla by ask them which subject they like best and why.II Revise everyday English by asking which cla do you have before our English cla and talk about it with the help of Everyday English and Function on P8 Step 2 Lead-in (Discu and compare

T: Everybody , we have studied in a new school named Pingluo Middle School .Before you come here , all of you studied in different schools, now I will give you some time to think what the main differences and similarities between Junior High school and Senior High school.And ask them to discu these two problems: 1 Do you think that work at Senior High school is harder than that at Junior High school? 2 Are Senior High teachers similar to Junior High teachers? T: After we have compared Senior High school and Junior High school, now we will learn something about Likang’s First day at Senior High .before we read the text let’s learn some words first.Step 3 Vocabulary Deal with the vocabulary on P2 by finishing the questions in the part.Step 4 Reading I Scanning Read the text quickly and try to find the answer to these questions: a What are the differences between Likang’s Junior High school and Senior High school? b What are the two things the English teacher thinks important to do in cla? c What are the two things that the English teacher want to improve? II Understanding

Play the tape for the students and ask them to listen & read following the tape in a low voice.Then finish the forth part in Reading and Vocabulary on P3.III Careful-reading Ask the students to read the paage again and find out which word in the box in the fifth part of Reading and Vocabulary on P4.And ask them try to gue the meaning and explain the words in English according to the text.Ask the students to read the three summaries of Likang’s opinion about the new school in the sixth part in Reading and Vocabulary on P4.Decide which is the best.IV Discuion T: We have known the Likang’s life at Senior High, is your English claroom like Likang’s? is your cla the same size as his? Is the number of boys and girls the same? Are you looking forward to doing your English homework? Now please discu with your partner and compare your school life with Likang’s.

Step5 Cultural corner T: we have learned likang’s school life at senior high, do you want to know the life of the teenagers in the similar age of you in other countries? Now please turn to P9, let’s read the text in cultural corner and learn something about the Senior High school life in the US.I Ask the students to listen to the tape and read the text.II Ask the students to answer the following questions: a What are the differences between the grades in China and the US? b How is the school year divided ?

c How long does the Summer Vacation last? d When do they start and finish school? e What do they do after school? III Ask the students to prepare a short reply to introduce the school system , vacation, study time & after-school activities in China by imitating the letter in Cultural corner.Step6 Summary The teacher summary the cla by comparing the school life in China and the US.Homework: I Write a reply to Rob Marshall II Read the text for as many times as they can III Preview the language points in these two paages.Period 3 Teaching content a the language points in the two paages b the important and difficult drills in the two paages Teaching aims and demands a get the students to master some useful words or expreions b get the students to master some important drills c get the students to do some exercises about the language points.

d to improve the students ability of using English Teaching methods a Explaining b Discovering c Practicing Teaching steps Step 1 Revision Revise last cla by checking home work and analyze the students’ replies.You can also ask some the students to read the good replies for the students Step 2 Language Study I Underline the useful expreions science subjectacademic subject be similar to… differences between A and Bthe attitude to… teaching method a city not far from … wr ite down… on the computeron the screen

information from websites a woman called….be nothing like speak a lot in cla have fun introduce oneself in groups give sb instructions work by oneself improve one’ s spelling in a fun way in other words

for one’ s homework a description of look forward to doing…

be impreed with… A is the same size as Bthe number of the American school systems secondary school cover 7 years receive the high school diploma go to college divide….into..September through December take part in be free to do… without the help of sbbecome friends last a long timeThere is a popular belief They say that have similar life experiences under the same roof Thanks for doing… ask sb about… do experimentshave dinner

stay on at school take a bus homeschool daybe fluent in Chinese speak Chinese with fluency make a lot of progre at the beginning of write to sb all over the world the smell of paint the wall move to… have the biggest smile II Analyze the language points A Words 1 information noun facts or details telling sth about a situation, person ,event, etc information about/on sb/sth 关于某人 /谋事的信息

a piece of information 一则消息; 一份情报

ask for information on/about 打听关于 …… 的消息 2 instruction n (pl sth that sb tells you to do 指示

(pl information on how to do or use sth 说明 follow the instructions for 遵守 …… 的指示 instructions on(how to do sth (如何做某事的指示 instructions to do sth 做某事的指示 on sb’ instructions遵照某人的指示 be under instructions to do sth 被指示做某事 instructions in 有关 …… 的指示

3 embarraed adj.feeling nervous and uncomfortable and worrying be embarraed to do sth 羞于做某事 be embarraed about/at 对 …… 感到困窘

4 attitude n sb’s opinions of feelings about sth, especially as shown by their behaviour attitude to/towards sth/sb 对某人 /某事的态度 5 behaviour n way of treating others ; manners behaviour towards/to …… 对 …… 的态度 /行为 be on one’ s good/best behaviour 循规蹈矩;行为检点 put sb on his best behaviour 规劝 /警告某人要规规矩矩

6 previous adj happening or existing before the event or object you are talking about 以 前的;从前的

the previous day 前一天 previous to 在 …… 以前 previously adv 以前;从前

7 impre vt.to have a favourable effect on sb ; to make sb feel admiration and respect impre sth in /on sth impre sth on/opon sb impre sb with sth be impreed at/by/with impreion n.make an impreion on sb 8 cover vt to include or deal with sth 包含 be covered by/ with被 …… 所覆盖 cover for sb 顶替某人 cover (a distance 走(一段距离 cover (sth new 报道(消息;新闻 cover sth up/over 盖住某物 Step 3 Practicing Ask the students to do some exercises about the language points just learned Homework

I Remember the usages of the words today II Preview and try to analyze the difficult sentences in these to paages Period 4 Teaching content a the language points in the two paages b the important and difficult drills in the two paages Teaching aims and demands a get the students to master some useful words or expreions b get the students to master some important drills c get the students to do some exercises about the language points.d to improve the students ability of using English Teaching methods a Explaining b Discovering c Practicing Teaching steps Step 1 Revision Revise the words learned yesterday by doing some translation exercises.(C to E or E to C.

Step 2 language study 1.The teacher is a very enthusiastic woman called Ms.Shen.这个非常热情的女老师是沈老师。

called Ms.Shen 是过去分词短语作定语,与所修饰的词之间存在着逻辑上的被动关系, 相当于定语从句 who/that was called Ms.Shen。 如: We visited the new library built three weeks ago.我们参观了三周前建成的图书馆。

The first textbooks written for teaching English as a foreign language came out in the 18th century.最早为外语教学而写的英语课本出现在十八世纪。 Most of the artists invited to the party were from South Africa.被邀请来参加聚会的大多是南非艺术家。

注:短语一般放在被修饰词之后,单个过去分词放在被修饰词之前 2.And we have fun.I don\'t think I will be bored in Ms.Shen\'s cla! 我们上课上得很开心,我认为我不会对沈老师的课厌烦的。 (1 have (great fun 玩得开心 =have (a lot of fun = have a wonderful time =enjoy oneself 如:

The children were having a lot of fun with the building blocks.孩子们玩搭积木玩得很开心。 You\'re sure to have some fun tonight.今晚你一定会玩得很开心。

They had a lot of fun chatting on the net.他们在网上聊天聊得很开心。

fun/,是不可数名词,常用于 be fun 结构中,相当于 interesting 。如 Seeing monkeys in the zoo is great fun.在公园看猴子非常有趣。

What fun it is to play a game after work! 工作之余活动一下多么有趣! 注 : 此处的 what fun不能用 how funny代替,因为 \"funny\" 是 “ 滑稽的,好笑的 ” 的意思。 [拓展]for fun=in fun 开玩笑地

make fun of 嘲笑,取笑。如

I\'m not saying such a serious thing for fun.我说如此严肃的事情绝不是开玩笑。 It\'s bad manners to make fun of the blind.取笑盲人是不礼貌的。

(2 我们要注意本句英汉表达的区别。 英语中有些动词, 如 think, believe, expect, suppose, feel, gue, imagine 等,当它们后面接一个具有否定意义的宾语从句时,通常要把主句的动 词变为否定式,而宾语从句中的谓语动词用肯定形式。这种现象称为否定的转移。如: We don\'t think there is anything interesting in your pictures.我们认为你的画并没有什么有趣的地方。

I don\'t believe what he said is true.我认为他说的不是真话。 I don\'t suppose they will object to my suggestion.我想他们不会反对我的建议。

He didn\'t imagine that she would go abroad.他料想她不会出国了。

I don\'t feel the food can last us through the winter.我认为这食物是不够我们过冬的。

注:在反意疑问句中,若陈述部分是第一人称, think 等词用一般现在进,则疑部部分 需与从句中的主语和谓语保持一致,否则要与主句的主语和谓语保持一致。如: I don\'t think it\'s going to rain tomorrow, is it? 我认为明不会下雨,对吗? You don\'t think I have made mistakes, do you? 你并不认为我犯了什么错误,是吗? 3 In other words, there are three times as many girls as boys.换句话说,女孩是男孩的三倍。

(1 in other words 意为 “ 换句话 ” ,在句中用作插入成分。如: In other words, she must give up singing.换言之,她必需放弃唱歌。

I\'m not used to the way you speak to me.In other words, I don\'t want to continue our conversations.我不习惯于你对我谈话的方式。换句话讲,我不想继续我们的谈话了。 Beethoven wrote many world-famous musical compositions.In other words, he was a great musician.贝多芬写过许多世界著名乐曲。换句话讲,他是一位伟大的音乐家。 ① A + be+倍数 +as+ adj.+as+B Asia is four times as large as Europe.亚洲是欧洲的四倍大。 ② A+be+倍数 + 比较级 +than+B Asia is three times larger than Europe.亚洲比欧洲大三倍。

③ A+be+倍数 +the size/length/height/depth/width+ of+ B Asia is four times the size of Europe.亚洲是欧洲的四倍大。

注 : time 表示倍数, 一般只限于表示基数词在内的三倍或三倍以上, 若表示两倍可用副 词 twice 或形容词 double 。 time 表示的倍数也可以用分数,百分数或某些表程度的副词替

换。

The street is twice the length of that one.这条街是那条街的两倍长。 Ten is double five.十是五的二倍。 This pencil is a quarter as long as that one.这枝铅笔是那枝的四分之一长。

Our room is 60%the size of theirs.我们房间的面积是他们房间面积的 60%。 4 I\'m looking forward to doing it!我非常渴望去做。

look forward to sth./doing sth.意思是 “ 期待着某事 /做某事 ” ,其中 “to” 是介词。

I look forward to hearing from you as early as poible.我期待着早日收到你的来信。

Boys and girls are looking forward to Children\'s Day.孩子们期盼着儿童节的来临。

I\'m looking forward to his return just as much as he himself seeing me.我期待他的归来同他盼望见到我的心怀一样强烈。 [链接]动词+介词 to 构成的常用短语有:

look forward to 盼望 …… turn to 求助于;转向;翻到 …… pay attention to 注意 …… stick to 坚持 get down to 开始认真干 …… object to 反对 belong to 属于 refer to 谈到,涉及,参阅 point to 指向 see to 处理,料理 come to 共计;苏醒 reply to 答复 agree to 同意 add to 增加

devote…to… 贡献 …… 给 …… comp are…to… 把 …… 比作 …… 5 The school year is divided into two semesters, the first of which is September through December, and the second is January through May.一学年有两个学期,第一学期从九月到十二月,第二学期从一月到五月。 (1 be divided into “ 把 …… 分成 ……” 。如 : Our cla is divided into four groups.我们班分成四组。 America is divided into over 30 stales.美国分成 50多个州。 (2 the first of which… 是定语从句,修饰 semesters.如: We live in a house, in front of which is a small river.6 I live in Shijiazhuang, a city not far from Beijing (1 far from a 远离 b 毫不;远非;一点也不

(2 away from & far (away from , 两个短语都可以用来作表语,状语和后置定语。其 中,其中 away from用在表示具体距离的词后面时,意为“离 …… (多远 , be away from意为“离开” 。 far (away from 通常不和具体的距离的词连用,意为“离某地很远” 。 We were sitting ___________(离 …… 太远 the stage to be able to see very much.The Smiths live ___________( 20英里以外 the city of New York.He works in a company ________________(远离他的家 。

7 …and Ms Shen’s method of teaching is nothing like that of the teachers at my Junior High school .Nothing like意为 “没有什么能比得上” , “丝毫不象” 。 something like 意为“大约” , “几分像” 。 It looks nothing like a horse.In summer there is nothing like swimming as a means of keeping fit.It must be something like seven O’clock.8 Today we introduced ourselves to each other.Introduce sb to sb 把某人介绍给某人 Introduce sth in/ into 把某物引进

Introduce sb to sth 引导或带领某人接触某物 Introduce sth to sb 宣布并介绍 Introduction n 介绍;引进;引论

An introduction to 对 …… 的介绍; …… 的引论

9 Oh really? So have I.“so +助动词 /情态动词 /系动词 +主语”表示“ (另一事物也 …… ” He is interested in physics and so am I If you can finish it in time, so can I .表示否定意义时用“ neither/nor +助动词 /情态动词 /系动词 +主语” ,意为“ (另一事物也 不 …… ”

Bob wasn’t at school last Friday, and neither/nor was Jack.

“so +主语 +助动词 /情态动词 /系动词”表示对之前或对方所说的情况表示赞同或证实,意 为“同一个人或事物确实 …… ”

------You have dropped a word here.------Yes, so I have.10 At the end of twelfth grade, American students receive the high school diploma.at the end of 在 …… 结束的时候;在 …… 的尽头; 在 …… 的结尾处 in the end (at last; finally最终,终于 by the end of 到 …… 结束时

at the beginning of (at the start of 在 …… 开始的时候 at the beginning (in the beginning ; at first 起初,开始时 11 I take part in all kinds of after-school activities… take part in

join in join Step3 Practice and summary Ask the students to revise the language points just learned, the teacher should make a short summary to help them.Homework I Remember the points learned today II Preview Grammar 1 , Listening and vocabulary , Pronunciation III Read the paages as often as poible.Period 5 Teaching content a Grammar 1 b Listening and vocabulary Teaching aims and demands a to revise the present tenses b to help the students to learn some forms of one word ,in order to introduce something about word-formation Teaching methods a Discovering b practising c listening and speaking d imitating Teaching steps Step1 Revision Revise the important points learned in last cla by translating some Chinese sentences into English.Step2 Lead in There are two sentences in the paage “My first day at Senior High” 1I live in Shijiazhuang, a city not far from Beijing .2I am writing down my thoughts about it.What are the tense differences are there between these two sentences? Ask the students to analyze the tenses.Step3 Grammar study T: Today we will revise the uses of the present tenses.One is the present

simple tense, the other is the present continuous tense.Now let’s look at some examples: (I She visits her parents everyday.What is the time by your watch? The moon goes around the earth.The train leaves at seven and arrives at nine.We will go to the park if it doesn’t rain tomorrow.Please tell him about it as soon as he comes back.(II All the students are looking at the blackboard carefully.We are learning New Standard English.Now we are leaving the claroom and approaching the playground.She is always thinking of herself.Ask the students to analyze the examples and try to find out the principles of the uses of the present simple tense & the present continuous tense.The teacher summarize the uses of the two tenses.Ask the students to read the paage again and choose sentences in the present simple tense and in the present continuous tense.Say which uses they show.Step4 Listening and vocabulary (I Vocabulary T: We have learned something about grammar ,now let’s revise some old words learned in Junior High English.Explain Explanation Pronounce Pronunciation Encourage Encouragement Understand Understanding misunderstanding Now finish the chart with the words in the box.Complete these sentences with a suitable form of each word in the box., then check the answers with the students.Ask the students to read the sentences in activity 2 again and answer the questions in activity 3.(II Listening T: I really don’t know if your answers are correct or not, so let’s listen to the conversation to check your answers ,and you must try your best to get the general idea of the conversation.Play the tape for the students, then ask the students to tell you what they have learned from the conversation.T: Yes , most of you have known something about the conversation ,but you didn’t get the details clearly.I will play the tape for you after you read the questions in activity 4.Now please read the questions quickly.Play the tape for the students and ask them to make some notes which will help them to answer the questions by write down some key words or phrases.Check answers with the students and write down the difficult points.Play the tape for the third time , stop when and where neceary, repeat the difficult parts.Step 4 Summary The teacher summarize the cla by revising the word-formation.And

ask the students to read the sentences in activity2 in Listening and vocabulary.Homework I Remember the words and the sentences in Listening and vocabulary.II Try to find some other principles of word-formation.III Preview Grammar 2 , Pronunciation &Writing.Speaking Period 6 Teaching content a Grammar 2 b Pronunciation c Speaking d writing Teaching aims and demands a get the students to master the uses of –ing form and –ed form b help the students to improve their ability of talking about the school life.c to improve students’ pronunciation by listening and summarizing d to teach the students something about how to write an E-mail reply.Teaching methods a discovering and summarizing b listening and speaking c imitating d discuing and writing Teaching steps Step 1 Revision a Ask the students to repeat the uses of the present simple tense and the present continuous tense.b have a dictation about the words and sentences in activity 2 in Listening and vocabulary.Step 2 Grammar I Lead in by doing exercises: 1 I was ________ when I saw the _______ news.(exciting & excited 2 The dog was ________ in playing _________ games, such as playing balls, wires and plates.(interesting & interested Now please look at these two questions, can you fill in the blanks? II Discovering and summarizing Read My First Day at Senior High again and underline the adjectives with –ing or –ed endings.After you have found out them try to find out the different uses of words with different endings.Ask the students to choose the correction explanation in activity 2 in Grammar 2.Finish the excises in activity 3.Step 3 Pronunciation T: I found some students could not pronounce the words with –ed endings correctly, now let’s have a look at these words: 1 amazed bored tired 2 embarraed 3 disappointed excited interested Play the tape for the students and ask the to find the differences and try to imitate the pronunciation .Ask the students to find out the principles.Step 4 Speaking T: We often take part in many after-school activities , now let’s look at the pictures in Speaking part to find out what the US high school students do after cla.1 What can you see in the picture and what are they doing .2 Is the school similar to ours? Explain why it is or isn’t.3 Do students at our school do things like this ? 4 How do you think about the after-school activities? Are they

good or bad? How can we make best use of after-school activities.Give the students some time to discu the questions and try to report their own ideas.Then the teacher make a summary.Step5 Writing T: We have sorrows and happine in our school lives, sometimes we want to exchange our feelings with others, so we write a letter or make a call.Now we will read a letter from an American girl who likes sharing her memories of her first year at school.Ok, please turn to P8 and read it.Give the students some time to read the letter.Go through the letter and deal with some important or difficult points.T: Do you want to write a letter to her and tell your memories of the first year at school.Now , can you tell me what should we write this reply and what will you write in it.Ask the students to tell their own ideas and collect them and write down them on the black board.The teacher give the students some suggestions.Ask the students to write the reply in the cla if enough time is left.Or, leave it as home work..Homework I Ask the students to write and correct their reply.II Remember the uses of –ing&-ed endings.III Finish the exercises about this module.

推荐第7篇：高一英语写作训练一

高一英语写作训练一

读写任务1

阅读下面的短文，然后按照要求写一篇150词左右的英语短文。

Some years ago, leaving the farm to work in the city, three brothers were

employed by the same company and on the same pay.But three years later, they received different wages.So their father was confused and decided to pay a visit to the bo, who told him that he would let his sons explain for themselves.

The three brothers were asked by the supervisor to go to the airport to get a cargo inventory at different times.Jim, who received 500 dollars a months, got the information on the phone instead of going to the airport himself.Frank, the 1000 dollars a month brother with a list of more cargoes.George, the 1500 dollars a month brother came back with detailed information and also did something extra without being told.

[写作内容]

1．概括该故事的内容要点，该部分的字数大约30词左右；

2．就“态度决定一切”这个主题发表你的看法，至少包含以下的内容要点，该部分的字数大约120词左右。

1）你认为是什么导致三兄弟的薪酬差异;

2）你从这个故事得到什么启示;

3）你对 “态度决定一切”如何理解?

4) 举一对比事例说明不同的学习态度产生不同的结果。

读写任务2

阅读下面短文，然后按照要求写一篇150词左右的英语短文。

Snacks can be a good way to stop your hunger and get the vitamins your body needs.But you need to pay attention to what you eat.Choosing healthy snacks means shopping smart.Be careful of the health claims on food packages.Just because something says “all natural” or “pure” it doesn’t always mean it’s good for you.Be careful of low-fat food claims, too.If the fat has been cut back the amount of sugar in the food may have been increased to keep the food tasting good.Many low-fat foods have nearly as many calories as their full-fat versions.Here are some ways to make healthy snacking part of your everyday routine.

*Keep healthy snacks with you.Keep plenty of fresh fruit and vegetables at home, so you can take them with you when you go out.

*Satisfy cravings (渴望) with healthier foods.If you’re crazy about chocolate, try a hot chocolate drink instead of a chocolate bar.Trade ice-cream for yogurt.If you want something salty, eat whole grain biscuits instead of potato chips.

*Pay attention to the amount you eat.As with everything, moderation (适度) is the key to smart snacking.

[写作内容]

1.概括短文的内容要点，该部分的词数大约30词左右；

2.针对本文所陈述的内容发表自己的看法，至少包含以下的内容要点，该部分的词数约120：

1)简述摄取过多的脂肪和热量的负面影响。

2)你对周围爱吃零食的人的合理化建议。

推荐第8篇：高一必修一英语笔记

English Notes

Book 1 Unit 1 1.add up 合计；加起来

add up to 总计达；总共有（多少） add A to B 给B加上A add to 增添；增加

add + that从句/直接引语 补充说，继续说 2.ignore (v.忽视，对…不理睬，不顾) ignorant （adj.不知的，无知的） ignorance(n.无知，愚昧) be ignorant of/about sth.= be in ignorance 对某事不了解近义: take no notice of / pay no attention to 3.calm: 形容水面平静,人的情绪不激动 calm(them/it/....)down quiet: 不吵闹，心里没有烦恼 still: 一动不动，静止 silent: 沉默，不讲话

4.have got to=have to/must have you got to...? haven’got to; don’t have to 5.be concerned about/for=be worried about 为…担心

be concerned with 与...有关；涉及

as far as sb is concerned=in one’s opinion 我认为 with concern 关切地 concerning prep.有关的 6.go through 1）经历，经受（不好的事）experience 2）仔细检查，审查

3）浏览，翻阅look through go的其它短语：

go after 追赶 go by 走过 go ahead 前进 go along 向前进，一起去go on 继续go over 复习go in for 爱好，从事 through的其它短语：

come through安然度过 look through浏览，翻阅

pa through穿过，通过get through 完成，穿越，通过，接通电话

注：through本身有从头到尾的意思 7.set down 1）写下，记下write down 2）制定，规定

3）将…停下来让乘客下车 set的其它短语：

set aside 不顾，把…放在一边 set forward 提出，促进set

back 使推迟set about doing sth.着手做某事set off 动身，出发

set out to do sth.出发，着手set up竖起，创设，开办 8.a TV series 电视剧

a series of 一连串的，一系列的，一套的 9.be outdoors(≠indoors) in the open air 10.spellbound adj.入迷的

11.on purpose 故意地 do sth.on purpose 反义：by chance/accident 偶然

do sth with/for the purpose of 怀着...的目的 12.in order to do/ in order not to do （句首，句末） to do（句首，句末）

so as to do （不可位于句首，只能放句末） 13.at dusk ≠at dawn thundering adj.雷鸣般的

14.be good to; be bad to; be +adj.+ to point 分数；point to 指向；point at 指着 15.not...until 直到...才 until/till 直到

get it repaired get sth.done 让...被做=have sth.done upset sb.使...不安

16.cheat in the exam 作弊 cheat sb.欺骗某人 cheat sb.(out)of sth.骗某人某物 cheat sb.into doing sth.骗

某人做某事

17.should have done 本来应该做某事（而实际没做，含有责备的意味）

should not have done本来不该做某事（而实际已做） 18.make a list of 列清单 在单上:on the list reason n.理由，原因

（1） 构成句型 The reason why ...is that ...（2） 构成短语the reason for sth/to dothe(some)reason There’s no reason for that.那事没有什么理由 19.feeling感到 feelings 情感

be afraid to do sth 害怕去做...be afraid of doing 害怕某事发生/sb/sth 20.hide:hide-and-hide 捉迷藏

hide away (1)躲藏 hide away in the forest (2)藏 hide away sth; hide sth away 21.It is...(被强调)that...be/get/grow crazy about 对...狂热be crazy to do sth 做某事是不理智的

22.do with 与...有联系 处理=deal with 区别：do with→what deal with→how

和for

have something to with与...有些关系=be concerned with have a lot to do with 与...有很大关系 have nothing to do with 与...没有关系 23.there was a time 有一段...的时间 there was a time when 这/那时发生了...24.take along 随身携带 by oneself独自；靠自己

25.far+adj./adv./比较级（加深程度） much too+adj.too much+不可数名词 26.happen to 碰巧 sb happen to do sth It happens/happened+that clause 27.dare( 用法跟need相似) (1) (2) 情态动词，常用于否定句（dare not）疑问句（dare提前） 实意动词，后常与不定式连用，但在dares,dared后或是在否定句中的to可以省略 (3) I dare say.我想，我以为=as far as I'm concerned 28.It/This is the first/second...time that+主语+have/has done It/This was the first/second/third...time+主语+had done 29.Look...through...透过...看...look through 浏览 It's no pleasure/use doing 做...没乐趣

30.face to face面对面地 （在句中作状语）face-to-face面

对面的（作定语） 类似的还有：

heart to heart 坦诚地 shoulder to shoulder 肩并肩地 back to back 背对背地 step by step逐步地side by side并排地 one by one一个一个地 arm in arm臂挽臂地 hand in hand 手拉手地

31.suffer 遭受，蒙受（后接痛苦pain，惩罚punishment, 损失lo,寒冷，饥饿,疾病等名词） suffer from…一般不用于被动语态 suffering n.痛苦，苦难 sufferer n.受苦者，受难者 32.recover vt.recover sth (strength/consciousne/one`s sight) 恢复...recover oneself 清醒过来，恢复将康

vi.sb recover(from illnee/lo) 某人（从...中）恢复过来

33.goip about get/be tired of sb/sth/doing be tired out 精疲力尽

33.do a survey /surveys（调查）

34.entire完整的，全部的，不分割的，切断，破坏之意，而

指所述整体

whole完全的，全部的，含有各部分完整无缺之意

total 全体的，全部的，意味着总额，总量，总数，强调把一切计算在内

complete圆满的，完整的，指各个部分完整，充足 35.power 体力，智力，能力/ 统治，政权/ 动力，电力 power用途最广，用于各种身心的，隐藏的，外显的力 strength体力，是内部的能力，在身体组织内存在的力 force 指活动的力，是Strength所展示出来的力，外部的力，势力，暴力

ability完成某事的能力 energy经历，之人内在的活力

36.settle vi.定居/ 使处于舒适的位置 vt.结束，解决/ 决定，确定，安排好 settle短语：

settle down 舒适坐下，定居，安静下来 settle down to sth.定下来心做某事 settle in/into sth.适应 settle on sth.决定某事/某物 settle up 付清，结算，结账

37.get tired of 厌烦，厌倦（精神上的讨厌） Be/feel/tired of sb./sth.厌烦某人/某事

Be/feel/tired of doing sth.厌烦做某事

Be tired with/from由于„而疲倦（体力上的疲劳） Unit 2 1.later adj.晚来的 （late的比较级） adv.后来地 latter adj.（位置上后面的） the latter (one) the former (one) 2.even if=even though 是连词词组，用来引导让步状语从句，意为“尽管、即使”，表转折：though,although,but 3.I’d like sth 4.That child come up to me.Come up to vi.走近come up 被提出 come up with 想出，发现 come acro 偶然遇到 come ture 实现

5.over+时间 over the pa years over cla/work 6.actually=in fact=as a matter of fact 7.be based on 以...为根据 base A on B A be based on B被动

base还可以用作名词，意为“底部，基础” at the base of 8.present 当前的，现在的（作前置定语） adj.the present situation present做adj.还有“出席的”的意思

at present;now;at this time;at this moment 9.make(good/full/no....)use of 使用

Every minute should be made good use of.make up 编写，编造，和解 make-up 化妆 make up of 由...构成 10.the number of/a number of 从意义上判断

the number of “...的数目”，接可数名词复数，谓语动词用单数

a number of 许多，大量（后接复数名词），谓语动词用复数 a great/large/small number of 11.be fluent in 12.such as&for example 全部列举 that is/namely for example:一般只举同类人或物中的“一个”为例，与所给例子用逗号隔开

13.The job was done.The job was difficult.The job(which/that was)done was difficult.14.standard (1)adj.标准的，第一流的 standard side (2)n.标准，水平，规范（可数）

reach/meet standard 符合标准 on a standard 根据某一标准

15.no such thing as...没有...这一回事

such...as...像...一样，诸如...之类的 such that 如此...

以致

16.expect sb to do sth sb be expected to do sth expect+that从句 认为/预想...expect sb/sth sb expect to do sth 某人希望做某事

I expect so.我想是这样 I expect not.I don’t expect so.17.play a part(role)in (1)参加某运动=take part in play an active part (2)对某事有影响，对某事起作用 18.recognize 辨认，认出 recognize his voise 承认，公认recognize sth/sb as sth/sb 19.way to do way of doing (in)the way ...的方，...的方式 (in)the way+that从句 (in)the way+in which 从句 (in)the way+从句

20.command (1)命令（2）vt.command sb (not)to do command that sb (should)do 命令某人（不）做某事 21.request(1)n.请求（2）vt.request sth (from sb)请求（从某人）得到某物 request sb (not) to do sth 请求某人（不做）某事 request that sb (should) do 请求...Unit 3

1.transport 作n.时，意思还有“（旅客或货物）运输”、运送等 vt.意为“运输，运送（货物，人，物等）” transport sb/sth to swh 2.prefer (preferred,preferring) prefer sth (to sth) prefer doing sth=prefer to do sth prefer not to do sth prefer doing sth to doing sth prefer to do sth rather than do sth prefer sb (not) to do sth 宁愿某人做某事 perfer that sb (should) do 宁愿，更喜欢 3.dream n.V.Dreamed/dreamt dream a ...dream(vt.) dream of/about sth (vi)梦见，梦想 dream that ...4.persuade vt.说服；劝服

persuade sb (not) to do sth =sb out of doing sth persuade sb into doing sth persuade sb(of sth) 使某人相信（某事） persuade sb that+从句

persuade暗示是成功的，如果“劝说”未成功，则不能用，用advise

5.get/make+宾语+宾语补足语（-ing/done/to do/adj.） 6.finally,at last,in the end的区别：《学案》 Finally强调活动过程的最后

7.It is /was ...（被强调部分）that/who+剩余部分【be动词固定，that/who】

8.on schedule=on time 准时，按照计划

ahead of schedule 先于预定时间 behind schedule schedule v 安排，计划，预定 9.insist:坚持认为，坚持主张 insist on/upon doing sth 坚持做 insist that 坚持说

insist that sb (should) do sth 坚持主张，坚持要求 insist on one’s doing 其它感官动词用法跟see一样：look at,hear,listen to,watch,notice,feel,observe 10.care about;be concerned about 忧虑，关心 care for sb/sth like look after 喜欢，照顾 care n.take care, take care of with care 小心地 adv.11.sb find it +adj.to do sth sth be familial to sbbe familialwith 熟悉 12.determined adj.坚决的，有决心的 be determined to do sth

determine v.决心，下定决心，确定

1）determine to do sth 2)determine+从句

13.change one’s mind make up one’s mind to do keep/bear ...in mind记住 read one’s mind 直言不讳 give/put one’s mind on 专心于

mind doing mind one’s doing 14.sth +be +adj.+ to +动

15.give in to 向...屈服 give sth on 上交 give up 放弃，戒掉

give up sth /give up doing sth 16.reliable adj.可靠的 rely vi.rely on 17.encourage encourage sb to do sth encourage sb in sth encouraging(adj.) encouraged(adj.) encouragement discourage vt.discourage sb from doing sth 18.view n.[c]自然美景，风景[u]视野，视域 in view adv.看得见 There is no one in view.[u]观点，见解 in one’s view=in one’s opinion one’s view(s) on/about 其它搭配：get/have a good view of sth 对sth一览无余 19.find it +形+to do sth funny 滑稽的 do sth for fun

have fun=enjoy oneself=have a good time make fun of sb=laugh at sb get changed 换好衣服 get dreed 穿上衣服 change可做名词，做“零钱”讲 change A for B 20.be put put up①举起，拾起=raise②挂起，张贴③建造，搭起=build④提供住宿put sb up 21.in company with 陪伴某人 lay 下蛋 lie-lied 说谎

22.give in (sth to sb) give up 放弃，认输 give out 精疲力尽，分配

give away 捐赠，泄漏 give off 发出光、气味 23put up our tent put away 把...收起来，存放 put back 放回原处 put one’s heart to 全神贯注于 put down 放下，写下，镇压 put out 扑灭，伸出 put an end to 使...结束 24.At first...,and then...The former...,the latter...The one...,the other(one)...Unit 4 1.trip:指带有目的的旅行 例如：busine trip

voyage:指航空，航海

2.attitude towards sth/doing sth 关于...态度 3.burst n.a burst of laughter/applause burst into+n.≠burst out+doing...突然...起来 burst into tears/laughter 4.as if=as though 1)as if 似乎，好像 2）as if 在表语从句中=that 5.be at an end=come to an end 结束 by the end of 直到...的最后（完成时） put an end to(介词)+n./doing 结束sth 6.believe sb 相信某人所说的话 believe in sb =trust 7.shock n.打击，震惊，震动 a shock to sb Vt.使震惊，使惊愕 shocking adj.shocked be shocked to sb 8.trap vt.trapped trapped 困住，陷入绝境 u.陷阱 set a trap (for) 设...陷阱

fall into a trap 掉入陷阱，be caught in a trap 中了圈套 trapped adj.被困住的 a trapped person trap sb into doing last for 持续...9.all...not...=not all...部分否定

当all,both及every的合成词与not连用时，表部分否定 完全否定要用no,never,nowhere,nore(单数，复数都行)，

neither,nothing,nobody等 10.bury (vt.) A.埋藏，埋葬B.蒙住

陷入...；专心于...be buried in/bury oneself in The+adj.表一类人或物（复数意义）

11.to:在境外，表方向 in:在境内，表范围内 on:与境界相壤

12.ruin借喻 destroy 彻底毁坏，很难完全修复 damage 价值、用途降低或外表损坏

13.give one’s congratulations to sb (for sth) congratulate sb on sth 14.judging from/by (句首) 从...判断 judge the case 15.be proud of proudly(adv.) prise(n.) be proud to do sth be proud that...take prise in sth /doing sth 16.honour 1)v.honour sb (with sth) 2)n.show honour to sb 向...表示敬意 an honour to ...对...是光荣的人或事

It’s one’s honour to do sth my thanks to sb for sth Unit 5 1.generously ①慷慨的，大方的 +doing sth/with sth be generous to sb with sth ② 宽宏大量的，宽厚的+to sb

2.devote vt.致力于，专心从事

devote oneself / one’s energy(time,effort,money)to(介词)sth/doing sth把...专于

devote adj.①深爱的②投入的 或be devoted to sb/sth 专心致力于...to是介词

3.found（组织）建筑 build founder foundation 基础 found (founded,founded) the foundation of mankind前无冠词，不可数名词 guidance (n.) guide(v.) 4.legal adj.legally agv.反义词illegal ①与法律有关的a legal adviser ② 合法的 be legal to do sth fee (vs) fare be hopeful about sth 5.youth ①v.青年时期 ②c.年轻人 ③ the youth 复数含义 violence violent blow up the balloon/bridge 6.be willing to do sth 反：unwilling a strong will 很强的意志力 be willing to do sth 愿意做某事

Where there is a will, there is a way.有志者事竟成 （地点状语从句）

at will 任意地，随意地

receive 收到 accept 接受 fairly 相当地=very

7.turn to 介词短语 ① 求助于，转向 turn to sb for help turn down 把（音量）调低 turn up 出现

8.fight ① n.打架，战斗 ② v.fight for 为...而战 fight against 与...作斗争 fight with 同...并肩作战 9.prison 表示蹲监狱时，其前面不用冠词 be in prison 在狱中，被监禁（状态） 反：be out of prison 出狱

put ...in prison=send...to prison(动作)=throw...to prison 类

似

：bed,church,cla,college,hospital,school,university,market be ...away 有...远（指距离，时间）

10.as...as+主语+can /could=as...as+poible 某些动词（see,find,witne）等“见证，目睹”主语有时不是人而是物、时间、地点 拟人用法，使句子生动 11.stage ①阶段，时期（at,in） ② 舞台（on）

stage 阶段，时期 situation:形容情况（强调周围环境）in the ___ position:位置，形势（强调人的立场）in the ___ case: in the ___ 11.reward for (doing) sth （做）某事的报酬/奖励

a reward for ...a reward of +具体的钱数 reward sb for (doing) sth v.reward sb with sth

13.trouble

Don’t trouble trouble until trouble troubles you.out of trouble have trouble (in) doing sth/with sth 14.lose one’s heart to sb 爱上，喜欢上 lose one’s weight lose one’s way 15.imagine+( one’s)doing should do 应该做 should have done 本应该...16.asleep是表语形容词，意为“睡着的” fall asleep be asleep sleep是动词或名词，意为“睡觉” sleeepy是形容词，意为“困乏的，欲睡的”

stop(prevent/keep) sb (from) doing sth =sb be stopped(prevented/kept) from doing sth 17.degree:n ①学位：get a degree ② 度，度数 10 degrees ③ 程度，等级

18.强调 ： do,does,did后面的动词要原形 be in power 当权，执政（状态）

the first time 引导时间状语从句，“第一次...”（类似用法：the last time,the moment,the minttue,every time...） for the first time 第一次

19.reward n.报酬，奖金 award n.奖品，奖项 award sb sth in reward 作为报酬/答 get nothing in reward

vt.酬谢，给人报答 reward sb with sth /for (doing) sth

推荐第9篇：高一英语每日一7

每日一练

（七）

供稿人：张建伟

单词拼写：

1.With the teacher’s _________________(许可), she went out earlier than usual.2.After waiting for half an hour, he was beginning to lose ________________(耐心).3.I’ll come on Monday unle you write to me to the _______________(相反).4.His illne _________________ (解释)for his absence.5.There is some smoke _______________ (冒出)from chimney.6.He has a good sense of ___________________(幽默).

7.The little boy was curious about the ants working in the field.He ______________(凝视) at them.8.They shouldn’t treat their mother in a rude _________________(方式).

9.Before he had no money left to buy tickets, he had to work his p____________(船票) to Australia.10.Journalists were on the ___________________ (现场)within minutes of the crash.完成句子：

1.They see a pennile young man _______ _____ _____ pavement outside their house.

2.It is Henry Adams, an American busineman, ______ _______ _________ in London and does

not know ______ _______ __________ ______________．

3.________ _______ ________ _______ ______, I landed in Britain _______ _________.4.The fact is _______ I earned my paage by ________ _____ _____ ________ _________,

______ ________ _______my appearance.

5.You must come ___________ your want and have ___________ you like.

语法填空：

Odyeus is a literary figure in the Odyey 31(write) by Homer.He rejected the comfortable life of a Greek king and made a promise to help another Greek leader, Menelaus, get32wife back.But the war 33(drag) on and on and he was away from his family for ten years.During this time the fortunes of the war were so 34(change) that no one

could predict 35would win.Odyeus became tired of the war and the delay in Troy.He urgently wanted to return home, so 36the Greek kings had their regular weekly meeting he suggested that they take 37opportunity to trick the Trojans.The Greeks built a giant wooden horse so that men could hide inside it.The Greeks then pretended to leave abroad their ships as if they 38(discourage) by the length of the war.The Trojans bleed their God 39their good fortune and prepared to celebrate.That night the men climbed out of the horse and opened the city gates to the Greek army.The Trojans awoke to the boom of the warning bell 40(announce) a Greek victory.So the war ended but the punishment of the Trojan people was only just beginning.

短文改错：

College students have a little ways to pay their college fees.Many students have their parents to pay the fees.Some students may apply to a bank loan and others will try to find part-time jobs in and out of the campus.Apart from this, many good student can win a scholarship.By this way they can pay at least part of the fees.As to me, I will let my parents pay half of their fees because they are rich enough.Beside my study, I will take up a part-time job by teach some high school students math, physics, chemistry and English, as I’m very good at these important subjects.Of course I will also work very hard at my leons in order to I can easily win a scholarship.

推荐第10篇：高一英语必修一词组

1． add up 合计；加起来

2． calm down平静下来；镇定下来

3． have got to 不得不；必须

4． be concerned about …关心……；挂念……

5． walk the dog 遛狗

6． pay for… 为……付钱

7． share…with… 与……分担/分享……

8． laugt at… 嘲笑……

9． go through… 经历；经受……

10．hide away 躲藏；隐藏

11．set down 放下；记下；登记

12．a series of… 一连串的；一系列；一套……

13．on purpose 故意

14．grow/be crazy about… 对……十分狂热；十分痴迷

15．in order to… 为了……

16．happen to do sth．碰巧做某事

17．go downstairs下楼

18．face to face 面对面地

19．put away… 把……放下来（待用）

20．at dusk 黄昏时分

21．have trouble with… 在……方面有麻烦

22．go along/on with… 与……相处；进展

23．fall in love… 相爱……；爱上……

24．think of… 想出……；想到……

25．join in… 参加……；加入……

26．show one’s interest in … 对……感兴趣

27．communicate with… 与……交流

28．pay attention to…注意 ……

29．more than one… 不止一个……

30．in some important ways 在某些重要方面而言

31．be different from… 与……不同

32．as a first or second language 作为第一或第二语言

33．because of… 因为……

34．British English 英国英语

35．American English 美国英语

36．than ever before 比以往任何时候更……

37．the number of… ……的数目

38．even if/though 即使

39．came up（with） 提出；长出；走进（某地）；发生

40．over time 经过这段时间

41．be based on 以……为根据；把……建筑在……的基础上

42．make （full）use of… （充分）利用；（充分）使用

43．a number of… 许多……；大量……

44．such as… 诸如……

45．at present 现在；目前

46．dream about/of doing sth．梦想做某事

47．be excited about 对……兴奋

48．graduate from… 从……毕业

49．make up one’s mind 下定决心

50．persuade sb．to do sth．劝说某人做某事

51．grow up 长大；成长

52．the way of doing/to do sth．作某事的方式

53．care about… 关心……；惦念……

54．a determined look 一个坚定的眼神

55．change one’s mind 改变主意

56．give in 投降；屈服；让步

57．keep doing sth．继续做某事

58．at an altitude of… 在海拔……的高度

59．at first 起初；开始

60．ever since 自那以后

61．in one’s daily life 在某人日常生活中

62．an interesting experience 一次有趣的经历

63．take a bike trip 骑自行车旅行

64．get a chance to do sth． 有机会做某事

65．make bends through…蜿蜒穿过……

66．at the college 在大学里

67．get sb．interested in … 使某人对……感兴趣

68．breathe the air/take a breath 呼吸

69．be fond of… 喜欢……

70．so…that… 如此……以致于…

71．as usual 像往常一样

72．make camp 宿营；野营

73．change…for… 把……替换成……；用……代替……

74．put up 搭起；张贴

75．at midnight 在半夜

76．at this point 在这个地方

77．can’t wait to do sth．迫不及待做某事

78．go to sleep 睡着了

79．for company 做伴 ；一起

80．look around 环顾四周

81．travel journal 旅游日记

82．practise reading aloud 练习大声朗读

83．have a good time 玩得开心

84．have a good trip 旅途愉快

85．take care 当心；小心

86．say hello to sb．向某人问好

87．have fun 玩得高兴 88．right away 立刻；马上

89．for three days 三天来

90．in the farmyards 在农家院子里

91．jump out of… 从……中跳出来

92．think little of… 对……不在意；认为……不好

93．at an end 结束；终结

94．the 20th century

20世纪

95．cut acro… 横穿……；穿近路

96．lie in ruins 陷于一片废墟之中

97．instead of… 代替……

98．tens of thousands of…数以百万计的……

99．under the ruins 在废墟下面

100．later that afternoon那天下午晚些时候

101．fall down 倒塌

102．dig out 挖出

103．coal mine 煤矿

104．to the north of… 在……的北面

105．give a speech 作演讲

106．a group of… 一组……；一群……

107．be proud of…/take pride in …对……感到自豪

108．in the terrible disaster 在这场可怕的灾难中

109．give out 散发；颁发；被用完；耗尽

110．thousands of… 成千上万……

111．break out 爆发

112．in one’s direction 朝着某人的方向

113．a frightening night 一个使人害怕的夜晚

114．frightened cows 受惊吓的牛

115．get on well with… 与……相处融洽

116．be willing to do sth． 愿意做某事 117．refuse to do sth．拒绝做某事

118．be active in… 热心于……；积极做……

119．lose heart 气馁；泄气

120．fight against… 与……作斗争

121．fight for… 为……而斗争

122．World WarⅡ二战

123．the three principles 三民主义

124．give up a rich life 放弃富裕的生活

125．give up doing sth．放弃做某事

126．be free from… 摆脱……

127．in a peaceful way 以和平的方式

128．land on the moon 登上月球

129．South Africa 南非

130．advise sb．（not）to do sth．建议某人（不）做某事

131．advise sb．on sth．就某事向某人提建议

132．be…away 有……远

133．break the law 违法

134．as a matter of fact/in fact 事实上

135．blow up 爆炸；炸毁

136．put sb．in prison 把某人投入监狱

137．achieve/realize one’s dream 实现梦想

138．work out 计算出；解出

139．fit in… 适合……

140．escape from… 从……逃出

141．imagine doing sth． 想象做某事

142．during the lunch breaks 在午休时间

143．the hardest time of one’s life 某人一生中最艰难的岁月

144．be asleep 睡着

145．allow sb．to do sth．允许某人做某事

146．allow doing sth．允许做某事

147．stop sb．（from）doing sth．阻止某人做某事

148．be well educated 受到良好的教育

149．in prison 在服刑；在狱中

150．fing out 找出；查明

151．government buildings 政府大楼

152．come to/into power 执政；上台

153．take sb．round…领某人参观

154．beg for 乞求；要求

155．the first time +从句

156．come back 回忆起来；恢复；回来

157．be able to do sth． 能够做某事；成功地做某事

158．encourage sb．to do sth．鼓励某人做某事

159．at the age of 51 在51岁时

160．enter university 上大学

161．set up law office 设立法律事务所

162．be sentenced to… 被判处……

163．write down 写下；记下

164．sort out 整理；归类

第11篇：高一英语必修一1

高一英语必修一1-5单元期中测试题

一、单项选择（共30分，每空一分）

1.Courage is one of the ________ of a good soldier.

A.succeB.interestsC.qualitiesD.difficulties

2.Fran is an honest girl.I say it, ________ I don’t like her.

A.first timeB.the first timeC.a first timeD.for the first time

3.—Where did you spend you summer holidays?

—I didn’t go anywhere, because I wouldn’t be able to go on holiday with my mum _______ ill

A.wasB.beC.beingD.to be

4.I have _______ all my papers but I still can’t find my notes.

A.looked throughB.looked forC.looked afterD.looked out

5.Having seen the film, he said what a wonderful film he _________

A.sawB.has seenC.had seenD.would see

6.I suggest that we take part in more such activities in future _______ we did last week.

A.whichB.asC.thatD.than

7.The number of people who _________ cars _________ increasing in China.

A.owns, areB.owns, isC.own, isD.own are

8.Alice trusts you, only you can _________ her to give up the foolish idea

A.tryB.attractC.temptD.persuade

9.I was about to go shopping _________ it began to rain.

A.whileB.asC.whenD.though

10.Is this the reason _________ at the meeting for his carelene in his work

A.he explainedB.what he explainedC.how he explainedD.why he explained

11.Thank you for all your hard work last week.I don’t think we _________ it without you.

A.can manageB.could have managedC.could manageD.can have managed

12.He must be from Africa, _________ can be seen from his skin.

A.thatB.asC.whoD.what

13.Seeing that he was so seriously ill, I insisted that he _________ to hospital at once.

A.was sentB.be sentC.will be sentD.had been sent

14.I’ll tell you _________ he told me last week.

A.all whichB.thatC.all thatD.which

15.-- I’m not sure if we’ll have a picnic this weekend.

-- It all ________ the weather.

A.takes part inB.depends onC.comes toD.puts up

16.On Sept.29, 2008，Shen Zhou VII returned to _______ earth from _______ space succefully.

A.the; /B./; theC./; /D.the; the

17.-- How is your life in the countryside?

-- It is _______ but sometimes I feel a bit _______.

A.interesting; boringB.interesting; bored

C.interested; boredD.interested; boring;

18.Paul is studying Chinese and _______ is his dream to work in China.

A.itB.thisC.thatD.there

19.Some students go to school _______ the tube every day.

A.withB.forC.onD.at

20.The volleyball match _______ if it rains tomorrow.

A.will put off B.will be put offC.is put offD.puts off

21.Put on your coat, ____________you will catch a cold..

A.soB.butC.andD.otherwise

22.We _______ rush ----- there is plenty of time.

A.can’tB.mustn’tC.ought not to D.don’t have to

23.They _______ claes when the earthquake happened.

A.hadB.would haveC.were havingD.are having

24.She has decided _______ as a volunteer teacher in a small village because she enjoys _______ challenges.

A.to work, to meetB.to work, meetingC.working, meetingD.working, to meet

25.Mary left London five years ago and I _______ her since then.

A.don’t seeB.didn’t seeC.hadn’t seenD.haven’t seen

26.-- Have you moved into your new house?

-- Not yet.The rooms _______.

A.are paintingB.have been paintedC.are being paintedD.have painted

27.We had a nice evening at my house and then Dad _______ my friend home.

A.takeB.tookC.was takingD.will take

28.More than 100 heads of foreign states _______ the opening ceremonies of the Beijing 2008 Olympic Games.

A.promotedB.organizedC.designedD.attended

29.Nowadays, old people like to live ________ there is no noise and crowds.

A.whereB.whichC.whatD.that

30.Christopher Reeve was seriously injured in the accident.But he _______ finally and returned to film making.

A.got onB.gave upC.pulled through

二、单词拼写（共10分，二填空(每空1分）

31.Mike is ___________(抱怨) about the bad food when he heard someone calling him.

32.With the new technology, the costs will be ________(降低) by 80% at least.

33.The big fire _______ (毁坏了)most of the building, causing a great lo.

34.After ________(毕业) , he will go to the western China to work as a volunteer teacher.

35.The soldiers covered a _________(距离) of 100 km.a night.

36.The boy wants to be an ___________(运动员) when he grows up.

37.It was very __________ (慷慨的) of you to have lent them your new car for their holiday.

38.He has made full preparations for the exam, so he is __________ (有信心的) for succe.

39.The government has taken action to s_______(解决) the traffic problem.

40.You have made a lot of spelling mistakes in your writing.You have to take it ______ (严肃地).

三、短文改错（共15分，每空1.5分）

As is known by all, the Internet is41.__________ playing more and more important part in our42.__________ everyday life.On it, we can only read news43.__________ at home and abroad but also meet so much44.__________ information as poible.We are often send e-mails or45.__________ make telephone call to our families as well as our friends.46.__________

However, we can go to school on the net, read different kinds47.__________ of books and even teach myself English.We can also enjoy48.__________ music, watching sports and play computer games on the49.__________ net.We can do shopping even without leaving our home.50——————四． 在下列定语从句中，填入适当的介词。

51.The pencil ________ which he wrote was broken.

52.He built a telescope ________ which he could study the skies.

53.The woman, ________ whom I learned the news, is a nurse.

54.The wolf ________ which the sheep was killed was shot.

55.She has three children, all _______ whom are at school.

56.There is a tall tree outside, ________ which stands our teacher.

57.My glaes, _______ which I was like a blind man, fell to the ground and broke.

58.In the dark street, there wasn’t a person ________ whom she could turn for help.

59.I was surprised at the way ________ which he treated the old man.

60.The age _______ which children can go to school is seven.

61.His bike ________ which he went to work was stolen last night.

62.Do you know the building ________ which is flying a red flag?

63.Ours is a beautiful school, ________ which we are proud.

64.The desk ________ which Jack is leaning is John’s.

65.He bought a book yesterday, the author ________ which is a teacher.

五.把下列各组句子合并成一句。

66.John is a very kind-hearted man.You can turn to him for help.

67.The book is written by that famous writer.I am very interested in it.

68.Tom is the boy.I went to the cinema with him together.

69.Have you remembered the factory? We worked in it last year.

70.It is the gold diamond.I spent all my money on it.

71.The old Olympic Games could date back to 776 BC.The modern games come from it.

72.I have nine friends in America.Four of them work as doctors.

73.The woman has just won a gold medal.I read about her in the newspaper.

74.The house is 7 kilometers away.I was born in it.

75.This is the very farm.My father used to work on it.

六．选择填空

1.This is the school _____ Mr.Smith once taught.

A.in that B.when C.where D.there

2.Have you visited the house _____ the famous scientist was born?

A.where B.in that C.that D.which

3.The factory _____ Mr.Li used to work was closed last week.

A.when B.where C.that D.which

4.Do you still remember the day _____ we first met?

A.that B.when C.what D.on that

5.The time _____ we studied together is not easily forgotten.

A.at what B.when C.that D.where

6.October 1,1949 is the day _____ we’ll never forget.

A.when B.that C.where D.in which

7.October 1,1949 was the day _____ the People’s Republic of China was founded.

A.which B.when C.where D.in which

8.Is this the shop _____ sells children’s clothing?

A.which B.where C.in which D.what

9.Is this museum _____ they visited last month?

.that B.which C.where D.the one

10.I still remember the sitting-room _____ my mother and I used to sit in the evening.

A.what B.which C.that D.where

七．改错

1.Is this hospital that they want to visit next week?

2.Is this the museum the one some German friends visited the other day?

3.He has two sons, each of them looks like him.

4.He will never forget the days when he spent with the villagers.

5.Please tell us about the people and interesting things which you have seen in America.

6.The knife which she often uses it to cut the bread is very sharp.

7.Please pa me the book that cover is red.

8.The sun heats the earth, that is very important.参考答案

一、单项选择

1-5 CBCAC6-10 BCDBA11-15 BBBCB

16-20 ABACB21-25 DDCBD26-30 CBDAC

四、单词拼写

71.complaining72.reduced73.destroyed74.graduation75.distance76.athlete

77.generous78.confident79.solve80.seriously

五、短文改错81.by-to82.playing后面加a83.can后面加not84.so-as

85.are去掉86.call-calls87.However-Besides88.myself-ourselves

89.watching-watch

90.正确

参考答案

二． 在下列定语从句中，用适当的介词填空。

1.with2.through3.from4.by5.of6.under7.without

8.to9.in10.at

11.on12.on13.of14.against15.of

1.John is a very kind-hearted man whom you can turn to for help./ John is a very kind-hearted man to whom you can turn for help.2.The book which I am very interested in is written by that famous writer./ The book in which I am very interested is written by that famous writer.3.Tom is the boy whom I went to the cinema with together./ Tom is the boy with whom I went to the cinema together.4.Have you remembered the factory which we worked in last year?/ Have you remembered the factory in which we worked last year? 5.It is the gold diamond which I spent all my money on./ It is the gold diamond on which I spent all my money .6.The old Olympic Games which the modern games come from could date back to 776 BC./ The old Olympic Games from which the modern games come could date back to 776 BC.7.I have nine friends in America, four of whom work as doctors.8.The woman whom I read about in the newspaper has just won a gold medal./ The woman about whom I read in the newspaper has just won a gold medal.9.The house which I was born in is 7 kilometers away./ The house in which I was born is 7 kilometers away.10.This is the very farm that my father used to work on./This is the very farm on which my father used to work.

三．选择填空 1~5 C A B B B 6~10 B B A D D 四．改错 1.hospital前加the 2.去掉museum前的the 3.将them改为whom 4.将when改为that 5.将which改为that 6.去掉it 7.将that改为whose 8.将which改为t

第12篇：高一英语必修一 unit3语法课教案

Book1 unit3 Travel Journal（学案）

课型：语法课

设计人：邓婷婷 时间：2013-10-15 学习目标: 1.从本单元找出以下的重点短语并识记。

从...以后_ever since_关心；惦念__worry about____喜爱;喜欢__be fond of____ 下决心___make up one’s mind___ 让步;投降___give in____ 通常;照例____as usual___ 2.理解并记忆文章中的语言点；

3.灵活运用句型翻译句子并把句子整合成5句话

其中2是重点，3是难点

学习过程: 1．语言点学习

(1)When I told her the air would be hard to breathe and it would be very cold, she said it would be an interesting experience.(P18)

[句型]： 主语 + be + adj.+ 不定式 [例]： I am glad to meet you.很高兴遇见你。[点拨]：1）用不定式的主动形式表达被动含义。

2）该句型中adj.常用 easy /hard / beautiful等。

此句型还可以转换成It + be + adj.+ 不定式

[拓展]：如果要说明不定式表示的动作是谁做的，可以在不定式前加介词for或者of。 此时句型结构为

It + be + adj.+ for / of + 代词(名词) + 不定式

[观察句子] : 1) It is good of you to come and meet us.你能来看我们真是太好了。

2) It was selfish of you to do so.你那样做真的是自私了。

3) It is neceary for us to study hard.对我们来说努力学习是必要的。

4) It is poible for them to catch up with us in a short time.对他们而言，短期内赶上我们是有可能的。

[归纳]：在”It + be + adj.+ for / of + 代词(名词) + 不定式”句型中，表示的形容词后常用of.这类词有kind/ nice/ carele等；而表示

的形容词后常用for，如easy /difficult /poible等。

(2)现在进行时的用法 现在进行时的一般用法：

①表示正在进行的动作：She is watching TV.她正在看电视。

②表示发展中的或正在改变的情况。表示渐变的过程。

The weather is getting colder and colder.天气变得越来越冷了。 ③与副词always 连用，表示赞赏、厌烦、生气等情绪。 You are always thinking about others. 你总是为别人考虑。 现在进行时的特殊用法： 现在进行时态表示将来，即表示按计划或安排将要发生的动作，但仅限于几个表示起止动作的动词，

如：arrive, come, go, start, leave, stay, move.①I’m leaving tomorrow.我明天要离开。

②Are you staying here till next week? 你要在这儿待到下周吗？ ③I’m going.我就走了。

④We are leaving for Nanjing tomorrow. 我们明天就去南京。 ⑤They are coming here this afternoon.他们今天下午来这儿。

(3)It was my sister who first had the idea to cycle along the entire Mekong River from where it begins to where it ends.（P18）

[句型]：强调句的结构It is / was +被强调成分+that/ who + 其它部分

[点拨] 1）强调距中it 不能更换；is / was 与”其余部分”的时态一致，不受被强调部分单复数的影响。

2）被强调部分可以是除以外的任何部分，如果强调的部分是人(主语),可用who,也可用that；强调的部分是人(宾语),可用whom；其他一律都用that。

(4)Although she didn’t know the best way of getting get to places, she insisted that she organize the trip properly.(P18) [点拨] 1).这是一个主从复合句。Although引导让步状语从句，不能再和but, and, however

连用。有时候从句的主语和be可省略.

2).insist + that从句：”坚持要求(做某事)”，that从句用虚拟语气，谓语用”

(should)+动词原形”,

3).insist on doing sth.”坚持要求(做某事)”

2,达标检测

(1) ___little boys spent ____little time planting ______many trees. D

A.So; so; so

B.Such; such; so

C.So; such, so

D.Such; so; so (2) The teacher told the students to stop _____ to him.

D

A.To write and listen

B.writing and listening C.writing and to listen (3).______，but he insisted on going to school.

C

A.Though he was ill B.He was ill

C.Having been ill

D.To be ill (4)He is so _______that no one can persuade him to change his mind.

D

A simple

B hard-working

C fortunate

D stubborn (5).To climb the mountain is ___ hard work and to go down the mountain is ___great danger.

B

A.a; a

B.a; /

C./;/

D./, a

（6）________ will be sent to Ning Xia to work as a teacher.

D

A.Do you think who

B.Whom do you think

C.Do you think whom

D.Who do you think （7）There are __________ many beautiful sweaters in the shop that I can’t decide which to choose.

A

A.so

B.such

C.very

D.too （8）The doctor insisted that I __________ more fruit and vegetables. C A.took B.had taken C.would take D.take

第13篇：高一英语the necklace教案

Unit 15 The necklace Teaching Aims: 1.Learn and master the following words and expreions: have a good time, without luck, pay off recognize,ball,continue,diamond,jewellery,necklace,palace,francs,after all, call on, bring out, try on, 2.Improve the students\\\' reading comprehension through reading activities.Teaching Important Points: 1.Learn the language in the play, especially in dialogues.2.Learn the usages of some words and expreions.3.Get the students to improve their reading comprehension.Teaching Difficult Points: 1.How to use the tenses correctly in a dialogue.2.How to tell the differences between“ after all, in all and above all”.Teaching Methods: 1.Question-and-answer method before reading to make students interested in what they will learn.2.Fast-reading to get the general idea of the text.3.Individual,pair or group work to make every student work in cla.Teaching Procedures: Step Ⅰ.Greetings:Greet the whole cla as usual.Step 2.Revision T:Yesterday we practised making up some short plays.Now I\\\'ll ask some students to act out them before cla.SS:Teacher asks two or three groups to act.Step 3.Lead-in

1.What kind of plays do you like best? 2.Have you ever acted in a play? What role did you play? 3.what should be included in a play? Step 4.Pre-reading

T:Now let\'s watch the play together.Watch carefully and then I\\\'ll ask you some questions.(Teacher plays the TV set for the students to watch.After that,teacher asks the students some questions.) T:When and where did the story happen? S3:It happened in a park in Paris,one afternoon in 1870.T:Who can tell me something about the play? S4:It\\\'s a play about a necklace.And it tells us a story about Mathilde Loisel,who borrowed a diamond necklace from her friend Jeanne.They were good friends then.When they met in a park ten years later,Jeanne didn\\\'t recognize Mathilde at first and then Mathilde told Jeanne what had happened to her.T:Yes,you are right.Step 5 Listen to the tape and answer the following questions: 1.What is the relationship between these three characters? Mathilde, the young lady and Pierre, the young man are couple Jeanne is Mathilde’s friend.2.What is the mood of Mathilde in scene one ? Why? Mathilde sound tired and upset.3.How does she feel in scene two? She is on one hand very excited for the ball , on the other hand she is worried because she has no new dre and no jewelry for the ball.Step 6 .Reading When and where did the story happen? A park in Paris , one afternoon 1870 Scene 1 : Time: One afternoon, 1870 Place: A park in Paris Who Methilde Jeanne What Met each otherMethilde looked older.Parts: Marthilde, Jeanne General idea: Marthilde tells Jeanne about her ten years of hard life.Choose the best answer When Jeanne met Mathilde in the park, she said she didn\'t know Mathilde, because ______ .D A.they hadn’t met for ten years

B.Jeanne no longer liked Mathilde C.Mathilde looked younger than before

D.Mathilde had changed a lot She had been working very hard for ten years , so she looked older than her age.Answer the questions after watching scene 1 1.When did the story happen? ( 1870 ) 2.Why Jeanne could not recognize Mathilde? Mathilde changed a lot and became so old.3.What made Jeanne think that Mathilde was ill? She doesn’t look well.4.Why Jeanne was so surprised when Mathilde mentioned the necklace? It happened ten year ago and maybe she has forgotten Scene 2: When: Ten years before(1860) Where: The home of Mathilde and Pierre Loisel Who: Mathilde and Pierre Loisel What Got an invitation to a ball and got ready for it.General idea: Pierre and his wife were invited to the ball at the palace.They decided to borrow some jewellery from Jeanne.Choose the best answer 1.Why was Mathilde worried when her husband told her the invitation? A A.Because she hadn’t got an evening dre.B.Because she didn’t want to attend the ball.C.Because she have no time to the ball.2.It can be learned from scene 2 that to be invited to the palace ball ____.C A.meant working hard day and night in the future B.meant spending a lot of money C.was a great honor

D.was not wonderful news 3.Mathilde did not want to wear a flower to the ball because_____ .C A.she didn\'t like flowers

B.people were not allowed to wear a flower at the ball C.it would look shabby（寒酸的） to wear a flower D.flowers would bring her bad luck Answer the questions after watching Scene2.1.Why did Pierre say it was wonderful news? He was invited to the ball.2.What kind of feeling did he have when Pierre was the only person in his office to be invited? Maybe he was glad and pride.3.Why didn’t Mathild want to wear a flower? Because everyone would wear jewellery 4.What decision did they make finally? They borrowed jewellery from their friends Scene 3: When: Ten years later(1870) Where: In the park Who: Mathilde, Jeanne What The story of the lost necklace.General idea: Mathilde lost the necklace at the ball.So she and her husband worked ten years to pay for it.But ten years later, Jeanne told her the necklace was not a real diamond necklace.Characters Description of each character Mathilde vain, glad, sad, scared, old, responsible… Pierre happy, careful, scared, responsible… Jeanne surprised, kind, friendly… Choose the best answer 1.How much money did they spend in returning Jeanne’s necklace? B A.It cost her over four hundred francs.

B.It cost her about thirty-six thousand francs.C.It cost her about five hundred francs.

D.It cost her about fifty-six thousand francs What was the real price of Jeanne’s necklace? C How much did Mathilde’s dre cost her ? A 2.Which sentence exprees the main idea of the story? A A.Mathilde lost the borrowed necklace and had to work hard for ten years to pay it back.B.Mathilde worked hard to buy a new jewel for her friend.C.Mathilde lost her borrowed necklace.D.Mathilde found she was cheated（欺骗）.3.What do you think of Mathilde ? A A.A vain （虚荣）woman

B.A hard-working woman C.A greedy（贪婪） woman

D.A pretty and rich woman 4.What’s the author’s writing style? A A.irony （讽刺）

B.humour

C.sorrow

D.delight 5.The story is told _____.C A.in inverse (反转） order

B.in narration order（叙述） C.in flashback order（倒叙）

D.in time order time order：Getting the invitation ----- Borrowing a necklace -----Losing the necklace ----- Buying a new necklace ----- Returning the necklace----- Learning the truth Questions to scene 3 1.What happened on their way home after the ball ? Mathilde found that the necklace was lost.They returned to the place to look for it but didnt find it.2.What did they do for Jeanne ? They borrowed money to buy Jeanne a diamond necklace which looked exactly like the lost one.3.What did they do in order to pay off the debt ? They both worked day and night for 10 years Step 7 True or False

1.Mathilde borrowed an evening dre and a diamond necklace from her friend for the palace ball.2.Mathilde was the only woman who was invited to the palace hall.3.Pierre promised to buy Mathilde a nice evening dre which cost about 400 francs T 4.That evening at the ball was the happiest in their lives because they had a lot of fun and Mathilde was the centre of people’s attention.T 5.They rushed back, looked everywhere for the lost necklace and they found it.6.They had to apologize to Mathilde’s friend Jeanne for that and promised to work for her to make up for the lo.7.They bought a diamond necklace which cost only 500 francs and returned it to Jeanne .8.They bought a real diamond necklace and returned it to Jeanne .Then they had to work night and day for 10 long years to pay off the debt .T 9.Jeanne didn’t recognize Mathilde at first because she changed a lot in the past ten years.T 10.Mathilde looked older than her age because she was ill.11 They lost the necklace on the way to the ball in the palace.12.Mathilde attended the ball wearing a flower.13.Finally they paid off all their debts.T Step 8 Summary of each scene Scene1 Mathilde meets her friend, Jeanne in a park and begins to explain to Jeanne why she looks older than her age.Scene2 Mathilde recalls the events ten years before that changed her life.Scene3 Jeanne remembers what happened.Mathilde reveals that she lost Jeannes necklace and replaced with another one.Jeanne tells Mathilde that the necklace she borrowed was a fake one.Step 9 Structure:

Borrow a necklace: Why an invitation to a ball When Ten years ago Whom Her friend Jeanne Lose the necklace when At after the ball Where Palace way Return the necklace How Buy a new one How much 36,ooo francs How long Ten years of hard work Learn the truth Not a diamond but a gla one Step 10 .Post-reading T:Now listen to the tape again.This time you should pay attention to your pronunciation and intonation.(Teacher plays the tape.After that,teacher gives students a few minutes to read the text aloud.At last students do an exercise for consolidation.) T:Now suppose Mathilde returned to the palace where the ball was held to ask about the necklace.She answered some questions asked by the workers in the palace please read these sentences and match them.(After a while,teacher checks the answers with them.) Suggested answers:1.E 2.C 3.B 4.F 5.A 6.D Step 11 Discuion If you are Mathilde, and you find the necklace is gone after the ball, what will you do?

第14篇：高一英语FRIENDSHIP,教案

篇1：人教版高一英语必修一unit1 friendship全单元教案 unit 1 friendship participants: 靳燕，黄洋，董妮娅，仝亚军，李桂秀，吴晓，邹舍龙 school: tai zhou no.1 senior middle school 1.teaching aims and demands 2.suggested teaching notes 1).analyses of the teaching contents this unit is about friendship, and nearly all the teaching materials center on it. friend, and in it reveals her longing for a normal life and days. matching. learning about language---it teaches the important expreions and structures and grammar: direct and indirect speeches. strengthening students’ abilities to practice language, discover, and solve problems. friendship, to get students to realize the culturaldifferences in the values of friendship in additionits importance in all cultures. 2) making of the teaching plan this unit centers on friends and friendship, exploring different types of 3.teaching plans for each period 1.teaching objectives: 1) target language i (don’t) think„„ i (don’t) think so.i (don’t) agree.i believe„„ that’s correct.in my opinion, „„ 2) ability goals a.describe your friends in english 3) learning ability goals a.to encourage students to think and talk about friends and friendship by using some phrases and structures. c.to cultivate the students to form the good habit of learning english in senior middle school. 2.teaching important points: a. b. use the given adjectives and sentence structures to describe one of your friends.learn to evaluate friends and friendship. 3.teaching difficult points: a. b. 4.teaching methods a.task-based teaching and learning b.cooperative learning c.discuion 5.teaching aids: cai you do in your spare time? you say something about it? do you have any old friends in our school? have you made step 2 think it over his/her name is „„

he /she is „„ years old. he /she likes „„ and dislikes „„ he /she enjoys „„ and hates„„ he /she is very kind/friendly/„„ girl friends boy friends pen friends long -distance friends friends of the same age e-friends (friends over the internet)friends acro generationsunusual friends like animals, books„„

1).______ is /are most important to you. step 3 make a survey i think a good friend should (not) be„„

3.then have the students do the survey in the textbook. 4.have the students score their survey according to the scoring sheet on page 8. survey and ae their values of friendship: ★ 4~7 points: you are not a good friend.you either neglect your 篇2：新课标高一英语上册教案unit1 friendship unit onefriendship teaching aims: 1.能力目标：

c.reading: enable the to get the main idea 2.知识目标： friendship i think so./ i don’t think so. i agree./ i don’t agree. that’s correct. of course not. exactly. i’m afraid not. c.to enable the to control direct speech and indirect speech d.vocabulary: upset , calm , concern , loose, netherlands, german, series, 3.情感目标: a.to arose ’ interest in learning english; b.to encourage to be active in the activities and make to be confident; 4.策略目标： teaching steps: period one 1. listen to an english song auld lang syne. step 2.talk about your old friends 1. talk about their old friends in junior middle school, talk about their appearance, personality, hobbies, etc. 2.self-introduction step 4.do a survey do the survey in the text ,p1 sep 5.listening and talking that’s correct.of course not.exactly.i’m afraid not. step 6.discuion divide four in one group and each group choose a topic to discu.there are four topics. step 7.summary in making friends. it can give me a piece of clear sky. it can bring me happine again. it can help me escape my troubles. it can’t be pulled and torn, because it is in everyone’s heart. it is there from the beginning to the end of our lives. dictionary. activity2: play a short part of the movies step2.predicting students read the title of the paage and observe the pictures and the outline of it to gue: step3.skimming students skim the paage in 2 minutes to get the main idea : step4.scanning anne step5.intensive reading step6.activity four students a group to discu the situation: step7.aignment task2.ex

2、3、4on page3 period three check the ’ aignment: task 2 step 2.language points: 1.add (v.) 2).to join numbers, amount, etc so as to find the total 相加 add up these figures for me, please. add to something: to increase 增加

add up to: to amount to 加起来等于；总计 the cost added up to 100 million yuan. 2.go through 1).to examine carefully 仔细阅读或研究 2).to experience 经历，遭受或忍受 3.crazy (adj.) 1).mad, foolish 疯狂的，愚蠢的 she is crazy about dancing. step 3.learning about language 1.finish ex.1, 2 and 3.on page 4. 2.direct speech and indirect speech: do ex.1 and 2 on page 5.then let the themselves discover the structures. step 4.practice using structures on page 42: ask the to use indirect speech to retell the story.step 5.aignment period four step 1.revision check the ’ aignment. step 2.reading read the letter on page 6 notes: 2.fall in love step 3.listening 篇3：高一英语人教版必修1 unit 1 friendship 教学设计

高一英语人教版必修1 unit 1 friendship 教学设计 人教版必修一

unit 1 friendship教学设计

一、教材内容分析

本单元是高中一年级的第一单元，刚开学没多久，大家相互之间还不是很熟识，需要了解、沟通，友谊是他们生活当中必不可少的，他们每个人对友谊的认识不同，见解不一。 2．在导入的时候我采用提问法，激起学生思考 3．快速阅读：弄懂文章大意

4．细读：弄清细节，找出生词、难句并完成课后的练习

1、2。

5．精读：讲解新单词、有用的短语、句型，并让学生自己举例应用。 6．深入了解文章的思想、写作风格并提出相关问题。 7．讨论如下问题： 8．课后练习

二、学生分析

高中一年级的形式已经在初中阶段的英语学习中,已经积累了一定的词汇基础,并掌握了一些简单的学习策略和技巧,具有初步的英语听说读写能力。这个班的英语水平参差不齐，教学既要进一步培养尖子的学习能力又要保证差生能听懂，调动他们的积极性，使他们愿意学，在学习的过程中享受到乐趣。他们已具备了直接思维和抽象思维的能力，正处于发展、培养创造性思维能力的最佳时期和智力向高水平发展的关键时期，他们有极强的好奇心和求知欲。他们对老师的期望也大大提高，不仅希望老师传授科学文化知识，更期望从老师那里获得更多的学习策略与技巧，分享人生经验。

三、教学目标 1.语言知识目标

通过对朋友的讨论，帮助学生发散式记忆积累相关描述人的性格、特征的词汇、习惯用语，并运用于听说读写当中。适当运用i thank so.i agree.i don\' think so .i don\'t agree exactly.i am afraid not .of course not.表明自己的态度和肯定程度。 2.语言技能目标

培养和提高阅读（浏览、寻读主要事实）的能力，形成用英语获取信息、处理信息分析问题、解决问题的能力，以及用英语思维和表达相关话题，复述课文及运用所学知识描述朋友的能力。

3.文化意识目标

通过与话题相关的图片、课文的学习，逐渐形成跨文化交际意识和培养基本的跨文化的交际能力，拓宽国际视野，理解各国的文化，进行反法西斯教育，为以后深入学习中外文化奠定基础。

4.情感态度目标

通过讨论友谊激发学生保持对英语学习的浓厚兴趣；有利与帮助他们树立正确的人生观、价值观；通过对课文学习的小组讨论等形式，帮助学生养成团结、协作的品质。 5.学习策略目标

四、教学策略

1．努力创设情境的原则

让学生想象自己待在一个隐蔽的地方，允许只能做的五件事，他们如何选择将学生直接带入课文的语境中。 2． 任务驱动的原则

让学生带着问题去阅读，找出相关答案，并分析整理形成自己的观点。 3． 交际法教学

五、设计思想

根据《高中英语教学大纲》的要求，在课堂教学中，必须以学生为主体，为中心进行教学，教师在教学中起主导作用。因此我采用任务型教学方式，每一部分都设有一定的任务，引导学生自主或者合作完成。阅读活动由整体入手，由易到难，步步推进，层层深入。整个教学活动以教材为载体，以学生为中心。在课

堂教学中，学生应该跟老师学学习方法，提高阅读速度和阅读技巧,查找﹑分析﹑处理信息的能力以及写作能力。积极参与小组的各项活动，展现自己和小组的能力，并培养团队协作能力。在整个教学活动中，学生充分调动其各个感官进行听、说、读、写，积极主动的学习。

六、教学媒体

1.the multimedia teaching system 2.the blackboard

七、教学过程

unit 1 friendship learning objectives and demands: 1.the activity is designed to encourage students to think about friends and friendship and to activate relevant vocabulary. 3.language use: speaking practice: reading teaching procedures: scared : astonish fearful frightened horrified shocked terrified timid loyal: devoted faithful beautiful: attractive breath-taking charming cool cute elegant eye-catching good-looking gracefulinviting lovelyneat prettysplendid stunning step2.leading in ask students questions: (2) intensive reading : 篇4：高一英语新课标人教版,第一单元friendship教案

1． get it repaired: get sth done=have sth done 让某事做? 2． be upset about 对?沮丧 5． have got to=have to 不得不

区分： have got to 否定形式为 haven`t got to have to 否定形式为 don`t have to ※be good to 对?好 be good at 擅长

finish doing sth完成做? 6.go on holiday 去度假

8.add up 合计，相加 add up to 达到

9.go though 经历；浏览；仔细检查：通过；批准；用完 11.be crazy about 对?痴迷，疯狂 13.on purpose 故意的

14.happen to do sth 碰巧做? 16.face to face 面对面【做状语】 face-to-face【做定语】

类似：heart to heart should to shoulderback to back 17.take no notice of 不重视 18.recover from 从?中恢复 19.pack up 打包

22.keep a diary 写日记

23.it`s a good habit for sb to do sth 对某人来说做某事时个好习惯

句型、语法整理

句的主语和助动词省略。

2.tell him that he should have studied should have done 本该做某事却没做

shouldn`t have done 本不该做某事却做了

② to 不可省略。因为tell sth to sb 4.a series of+n(复)+v(单) “一系列的” eg.a series of books has been published 6. in order to do sth to do sth为了做某事，引导目的状语，放句末，句首 so asto do sth 但 so as to do sth 只可放句末 7.the moom gave far too much light„... ①too much+不可数名词 太多?。

第15篇：高一英语performance教案

Leon 1 Performance Teaching aims: To practise the vocabulary relating to concerts and performance.To read and understand a concert review To practise using will for decisions To practise using time clauses with as soon as, when, before...and clause of conceion with although / though Teaching difficulties: To practise using will for decisions

To practise using time clauses with as soon as, when, before...and clause of Teaching Aids: computer and caette Teaching procedures: Ⅰ.Warming up

First listen to a song that is sung by Alanis ----everything T: Now pop songs are popular with teenagers.Have you heard of the song?

What do you think of the song? S: T: Do you know who sing it? S:

T: Teacher show the picture of Alanis ---the superstar, a true performer.Do you want to know her? S: T: Now let‟s read an article about the superstar, and you will learn more information about her.Ⅱ Reading Read the concert review and match the four paragraphs with the titles.a) the end of the concert

para4 b) how the audience reacted

para3 c) the songs played

para2 d) the start of the concert para1 T: Ask the question: How much do you know about her? S: T: The Canadian rock singer and song writer, has won Grammy Awards for Best Rock Song.Her has made many albums.She become world-famous singer.Do the exercise 3.Read the review again and answer these questions.Ⅲ Understanding the text a) Correct errors 1.She is used to be in the public eye.2.Her new album was come out in 1995.3.On last Thursday night, hundreds of fans went to the concert held in Cambridge.4.The 30-years-old singer is popular with young people.5.The song tells the story of someone looks for real love.6.The atmosphere was extremely exciting so that many people stand to cheer.7.The Canada singer was famous in her twenties.8.Her new album that was published last week is sold well.

Answers: 1.be改为 being 2.去掉was把come 改为came 3.去掉 on

4.years 改为year 5.looks改为 looking 6.stand 改为stood 7. Canada 改为Canadian 8.去掉 is 把sold改为 sell

b) According to the text arrange the right order.1.Alanis won this year‟s Grammy Award or the best rock song.

2.Moriette gave a creative and powerful performance in the song „Utopia‟.3.Many fans went to the Corn Exchange in Cambridge, England to see her in concert.4.Everyone in the auditorium agreed that they were greatly impreed by the concert.5.Alanis‟ album Jagged Little Pill came out Answers: 5 1 3 2 4 Ⅳ speaking

We know singer‟s performance is important for a concert, besides singers concert need other‟s stage effect , such as (show a slide)guide student to say out stage design , lighting, special effects and so on.Have you ever watched a concert “live”, on TV or on video? Tell the cla about it using the Key Words to help you.Do the exercise 1 Show a slide, ask students to say out music style Rock „n‟roll Voice your opinion Why are pop music and rock „n‟ roll loved by many young people Ⅴ Vocabulary Do the exercise 4 Ⅵ Grammar Do the exercise 6and 8

Listen to the telephone conversation.Who decides to pick up the concert tickets , Sue or Ricky? What verb form do Sue and Ricky use to make sudden decisions as they speak? Do the exercise 7 Listen again.Who said these things, Sur or Ricky? Check these answers with the whole cla and then look at the sentences, what linking words are used? In order to help students further understand the text the teacher can ask the following questions.1.Why can‟t Ricky pick the tickets up at lunchtime tomorrow? 2.Why can‟t he pick them up after school tomorrow? 3.Where does Ricky‟s mum work?

4.Where is Sue going after she‟s got the tickets? Do the exercise 9, 11 and 12 Ⅶ Language in use Work in pairs and talk about your future plans.Use the expreions below to help you.go to college, find a job, rent a flat, learn to drive, go on holidays, continue studying Ⅷ Homework Do the exercise page 66 and 67.

第16篇：学年高一作文教案一

2010-2011学年（上）高一作文教案一

、话题呈现

走进高中，你就实实在在站在了青春的门槛前，这是一个令人羡慕又让人担忧的年龄。青春的激情带有几分单纯，求新的热望夹杂着一份冲动。有时热情似火，有时心静如水；有时迷茫似雾，有时开阔如海；冲动而又热忱，复杂而单纯，容易沮丧而又很快兴奋，这就是作为高中生的我们。

站在“青春的门槛”前，你有过怎样感人的经历，你见过怎样动人的风景，你又有怎样独到的见解和认识呢？请以“青春的门槛”为话题，写一篇文章，立意自定，标题自拟，文体自选，不少于700字。 一

二、写作点拨

可以写一篇散文。青春之美，美在青春之容貌，青春之活力，青春之思想，青春之情感。站在青春的门槛前，你可以回忆往昔的纯真风月，留恋那美丽的童年少年时光；你也可张望成人世界的精彩，表达对成熟的渴望；你可以描绘壮丽的人生蓝图，喊一声青春的号子；你也可以评说青春的意义和价值，抒发将青春献给祖国的豪情壮志„„一次追求，一段困苦，一阵迷惘，一份惊喜„„

多彩的青春应有丰富的情感旋律，而初恋无疑是其中动人的音符。许多名人回顾自己的青春岁月，也会情不自禁地弹奏起初恋动人的音符。“我手写我心”，面对“青春的门槛”这一话题，选择初恋题材，叙写自己的情感经历，抒发的感受和认识，也是美妙的“青春”之歌。

可以写一篇记叙文。以“自己成长经历中遭受的那些挫折打击”为内容，把这些挫折打击比喻为青春成长中的风雨，开头简洁地概括自己成长经历中所受挫折的深刻体验：“成长过程中风雨的滋润是甜的”。接着分段细致地记叙自己经历的几件典型事例。如，考试失利、比赛失败、身边不如意的小事、家庭内部矛盾的影响等。这些事例不尽相同，但有一个共同的感受就是“甜的”。最后用一段写出总的体验：成长的雨季，的确很长，但我们要坚信，雨季过后就是充满彩虹的美好未来。迈过雨季的成长之路，就能看见无法形容的美景。风雨路上，敞开怀抱，用心去感受它，你会发现，这雨是甜的。

三、素材启示

1．青春名言

青春不是人生的一段时期，而是心灵的一种状况。（塞涅卡） 青春时期是豁达的时期，应利用这个时期养成自己豁达的性格。（罗素）

啊，青春！青春！或许你美妙的全部奥妙不在于能够做出一切，而在于希望做出一切。（屠格涅夫）

但见玫瑰丛中，青春的舞蹈与欢容，只闻歌颂青春的谐乐与欢踪，轻捷的步履，你永向前领，欢乐的光明，你永向前引：我是个崇拜青春、欢乐与光明的灵魂。”（徐志摩）

所有的结局都已写好，所有的泪水也都已启程，却忽然忘了是怎么样的一个开始，在那个古老的不再回来的夏日，无论我如何地去追索，年轻的你只如云影掠过，而你微笑的面容极浅极淡，逐渐隐没在日落后的群岚。遂翻开那发黄的扉页，命运将它装订得极为拙劣，含着泪，我一读再读，却不得不承认，青春是一本太仓促的书。（席慕容）

青年者，人生之王，人生之春，人生之华也。——李大钊 百金买骏马，千金买美人；万金买高爵，何处买青春？——屈原 白日莫闲过，青春不再来。——林宽

青春啊，永远是美好的，可是真正的青春，只属于这些永远力争上游的人，永远忘我劳动的人，永远谦虚的人！——雷锋

一个民族的年轻一代人要是没有青春，那就是这个民族的大不幸。——赫尔岑

青年时期是豁达的时期，应该利用这个时期养成自己豁达的性格。——罗素 2．青春格言

生活赋予我们一种巨大的和无限高贵的礼品，这就是青春：充满着力量，充满了期待、志愿，充满着求知和斗争的志向，充满着希望、信心的青春。

青春是美妙的；挥霍青春就是犯罪。

一生最好是少年，一年最好是青春，一朝最好是清晨。

丝染不复白，鬓白无重黑；努力爱青春，一失不再得。

莫等闲白了少年头，空悲切。

青春岂不惜，行乐非所欲。

少壮轻年月，迟暮惜光阴。

男儿生身自有役，那得误我少年时。

青春是有限的，智慧是无穷的，趁短短的青春，学习无穷的智慧。

青春，是人生组歌中的一首绝唱，它理应同最美的事物联在一起。

四、例文展示

感慨青春

岁月悠悠，任飘逸的白云牵走童稚的歌谣，任滔滔东逝的江水载走纯真的幻想。在不知不觉间我们已站在了青春的门槛前------徘徊、张望„„

青春或许是多彩的吧？我们每个人都是独立的个体，我们每个人都有属于自己的画笔。难道，你曾见过两片完全相同的树叶？聪明的你，自然能够在草长莺飞的日子里感受得到青春的多姿。

青春一定是多彩的。因为不同的丹青手描绘出了不同的风景，不同的风景构成了绚丽的青春。不然，怎会有“一花独放不是春，百花齐放春满园”的感慨？青春定有满园的春色，那一枝斜墙而出的红杏定是青春多彩的象征。不然，怎会有“满园春色关不住，一枝红杏出墙来”的惊奇？请不要说我们善变却又碌碌无为。我们只是在尝试不同的经历与情感。更何况一成不变的人生并不意味着业绩伟大，它或许意味着人生湖泊的不断缩小。想想死海吧，它不是在日复一日的缩减么？聪明的你一定会明白其中的奥妙，人生之所以有激情是因为有青春的参与，青春之所以绚烂则是因为有我们的活力！

雄鹰展开有力的双翼满载着梦想飞向金色的太阳。青春裹着希望的外衣，佩着甜蜜的香囊施施而行„„

请不要说梦亦碎，心易成灰。有梦就有希望，有希望就有跨越山峦的彩虹。请不要说希望越大失望越大。“君不见高堂明镜悲白发，朝如青丝暮成雪”。我们为什么要在付出前就哀悼失败？青春赋予我们“三万里河东入海，五千仞岳上摩天”的坚韧，青春更带给我们“驾长车，踏破贺兰山缺”的豪迈与“待从头，收拾旧山河”的壮志。我们岂会未付出而哀叹，未进取而言后退？总之，青春的我们拥有的自信，青春的自信鼓舞着我们前行。

毛泽东曾豪言“数风流人物还看今朝”。不错的，青春让我们更有创新的能力与无畏的拼搏精神。我们会肩负起振兴祖国的责任。请不要对我们摇头说“一代不如一代”。你们也曾遭受置疑，但你们依然完成了祖国交付的任务。同样，青春的拥有者——我们也会在青春的激情下奋力拼搏。我们不会学易安居士空吟“知否，知否，应是绿肥红瘦”；也不会像稼轩那样“欲说还休，欲说还休”；更不会像贺铸一样“锁窗朱户”。我们开朗，我们果断，我们更容易接纳新的事物！青春就是一种别样的激情，别样的美丽！

当五月的风送来沁人心脾的五月槐香时，我们不再徘徊，不再张望。踏着风驰的节拍，踏着轻盈的脚步，与清风共舞与黄莺同唱！

[简评]青春是一个比较大的话题，很难把握。但作者洋洋洒洒，尽展了年轻人的活力。全文表现了作者的朝气、激情和勇气。

文章很有层次感，逐层推进，并且引用了一些名句，自然贴切。 读此文，可以让我们豪情倍增，激情满怀。我们仿佛听到了作者的召唤，引领我们走近青春，去体验青春那无比的魅力！ 例文二]

等你，在雨中

等你，在雨中，在造虹的雨中，等待青春诗意的幽梦-----

一

一朵乳润的蓓蕾在雨意滋长的小巷中，缓缓走出莲的步子；一丝喑哑的曲调在青苔饮醉的石板上，轻轻舒卷季节的惆怅„„

袅袅墨香在游弋的木兰舟中恣意悠悠古韵，层层涟漪在漫溯的长篱下荡漾柔柔的抑郁。

撑一把油伞，等你，在雨中。 纤纤丝雨——

迷离着，轻飏着，消融了黯香，淡化了古韵；翩跹着，弥散着，扰乱了清波，悠长了惆怅。

二 等你，伴着落雨的音韵，在朦胧的康桥上，痴痴地凝望„„ 一柄桂桨轻摇忧悒的梦寐，一盏清灯轻燃痴醉的冥思。

幻散的情愫在桨橹的记忆中沉淀，刻骨的记忆在烛光的澄明里斑驳。 轻轻在易安的蚱蜢舟中沉醉不知归路，缓缓在柳永的杨柳岸酣然不知来途。

等你，依稀在雨中。在天涯江渚上，与寂寂冷雨为伴的客舟中，空空掩卷思恋。

三

徜徉，以一颗玉壶里的冰心，在暮雨的黄昏，弹奏梦里江南丝竹的清韵。在绵延的丝雨中洞开一扇轻窗——望你迷蒙的背影。

有一曲旷古的笛音从氤氲的雾气里飘来，有一丝馥郁的馨香在渺远的时空弥散。更有一缕沁人的气息在我灵魂的心底里游荡„„ 凝眸，你油油的在水底招摇；又瞬间消弥，飘渺不定。在回眸，软泥上只有青荇微柔的笑靥，恬淡，静美。

彷徨，在寂静的古廊凭栏眺望——你在不尽的远方隐现。 雨线模糊了我的视线，也朦胧了你纤柔的身影„„

四

掬一捧清水，浣洗疲惫的面容；吟一阕瘦词，涤去岁月的懵懂；沏一杯奶茶，在夜阑的舟中，望你姗姗的步履„„

缕缕清风丝梦般迷醉，蒙蒙细雨氤氲着丝梦，渐渐引我酣然„„ 在梦里，在清波摇曳的悠梦里，在雨意阑珊的小巷中—— 步雨的红莲翩翩，有韵地走来„„ [简评]作者以拟人的手法，诗一样的语言表达了自己对青春的那份渴望、懵懂、困惑以及惆怅的心情。是啊，对于刚踏入“青春的门槛”达到她来说，青春还是一个解不开的谜团。尽管先人曾描绘了无数的青春的美妙画卷，但青春到底是什么颜色，还需要自己去体验、感悟。 诗一般的语言，颇见作者的文字功底，而那份灵动飞扬的思绪更让人惊叹。作者在文章中化用了许多古代名句，文章中也有现代诗《雨巷》的影子，可见，作者能够学以致用。

行走在青春的雨季

在青春中行走的孩子们有着梦一般的迷境，去寻找，去探索；在青春中行走的孩子们有着五光十色的梦想，去追求，去向往；在青春中行走的孩子们有着琐碎之至的愁思，去面对，去化解„„

青春中有雨季，只有直面雨季的孩子才能成为少年。青春呵！抖抖身上的汗给他们来了一次考验。

细雨连绵。孩子们接连进出这个临时的世界。

女孩甲。看到这片连绵阴沉的天，玉琢般的小脸上染了一层“黑云”。带着几许不快，脚步缓了下来。雨开始点点打在她精致的面庞上，她有些害怕了。在这个鬼天气中，只有她一个人在这里，无人依靠。愈想愈怕，她终于抛开心中的压抑，梨花带雨地哭了出来。命运老人叹了口气。

男孩乙进入。他的脸色和天色一样铁青，雨愈下愈大，雨滴打在他铁青色的脸上。天色渐行渐暗，他变得多疑，不断猜测，哪怕只有一点风吹草动也胆战心惊。命运老人看不下去了。 可他不知道，女孩后来带着满脸泪痕站了起来，男孩不再害怕，笔直地朝前走去。青春的细雨，终究难不倒这群勇敢的少年啊！跌倒了再爬起，他们的资本总那么丰厚，一次又一次屹立在黑暗中。

在同命运老人做的这个游戏中，少年们终究可以到达终点。有人说过“自己选择的路，就算跪也要走下去。”少年的意志竟然如此坚定。是这场雨的缘故吗?谁说不是呢。

在路途中，细雨里，他们却是不断完善自我。在这个雨季中，他们希望能在太空做生意，能在海底寻龙宫，能在地球拯救世界，一统天下。多么狂妄的少年！有人评论。少年并不在乎，他们有他们自己的信念与追求，又怎么会在意他人的眼光? 在雨季中，他们开始学会用天赐的肩膀挑起那沉重的担子。他们开始用自己的双手温暖他人的心；他们开始用敏锐的眼睛去捕捉那瀚海的知识；他们开始用稚嫩的双脚去开拓一条平坦的路„„少年们在雨季中不乏欢乐，他们懂得怎样去欣赏这场命运老人给予的雨，虽然雨斜斜地打着自己的脸，他们却自豪地昂首挺胸，望着云后的太阳„„

行走在青春的雨季中，他们也许哭过，也许迷茫过，也许放弃过，也许„„但之所以他们能被称做少年，他们一定是面对了这场雨，在雨中懂得了许多许多！

我们虽然不能退出这场游戏，但我们可以昂然地行走在这青春的雨季中。向着那金色的太阳，奔走吧！

2010年9月9日

本次作文批改情况记录：

第17篇：《项链》教案(高一必修一)

设计者：王琪玮

教学目的：

1、鼓励学生学习玛蒂尔德时积极主动地阅读与参与。

2、提供听说评讲的机会

3、学习小说描写人物特征在考试中的特定技巧。

4、鼓励学生多种形式的评价与写作。

教学目标：

1、完成《项链》人物形象的剖析。

2、学会评价小说人物

3、至少培养5---10位同学学会听说评讲的能力 环节

一、导入

世上有许多妩媚美丽动人的姑娘，她们可以以凭借自已的美貌和聪明嫁到一个很富有的家庭中，享受受着人生的快乐，然而由于命运的差错，使本应生来就可以享受各种豪华生活的她们，却过着与她们身份与美丽十分不相称的生活，在贫困的日子里痛苦地活着，这样的生活对于这些美丽的女性来说，是多么的残酷。 下面我们就一起走进法国作家莫伯桑的《项链》，了解美丽、娇艳、丰韵的姑娘玛蒂尔德真实的人生历程。

过渡：玛蒂尔德由于天生聪明与美丽，使她的欲望与处境形成强烈的反差，但她内心总是充满着对未来的各种幻想、，当梦想不可及时，又“伤心、悔恨、失望、困苦”，而有一天，玛蒂尔德终于得到一个绝好的机会，那就是可以参加教育部部长举行的夜会。下面请同学们分角色朗读“她连忙折开信„„带着宝贝很快地跑了。” 环节

二、班级活动思考问题：

你了解玛蒂尔德哪些方面，她的言行举止与人物的身份恰当吗，在她所生活的社会中玛蒂尔德是一个贪图享乐的坏女人吗？ 环节

三、活动方式：

1、现在我们分若个小组，每组发给出一张a3纸，小组的一半成员收集能为玛蒂尔德辩护的信息，另一半准备相反的材料。

2、每小组有十分钟时间记下已经了解的信息，每小组至少有一人占有恰当的文献资料。每小组有一个主要故事情节列表和对人物评价列表。（材料参照发放材料） 故事情节列表和对人物评价列表：

情节 言行举止 人物的性格认识 自已对人物的终极立场 支持立场材料

语言

背景材料：

动作

外貌

直接材料：

心理

间接材料：

3、所有小组发言后，小组记录员把小组的有关立场，支持性材料的列表拿给对立方小组，对立方小组再根据所得到的材料认真审理，从中发现什么，向对立方提出，看看对立方能否增加一些支持性细节与否。

4、每个小组一起向全班同学反馈，确保所有学生在练习本上记下必要的信息材料。

过渡:玛蒂尔德真的是一个贪图享乐的坏女人吗？下面请同学们分角色朗读“她连忙折开信„„带着宝贝很快地跑了。” 环节

四、播放小说结束部分录像。

①根据人物心理特征确立一个关键词，写一段300字以内的人物评论。要求每个关键词至少要列出五点以上依据来证明。②抽查展示评论，至少抽查五位。环节

五、总结玛蒂尔德的真实心理历程和文章主题。

第18篇：高一7班安全教育教案(一)

高一7班安全教育教案

（一）

教学目标：

1、教育学生遵守交通规则，注意人身安全。

2、树立起正确的安全防卫心理,加强安全防卫意识教育，培养正确的安全防卫心理。

3、掌握紧急情况下的逃生策略。教学要求：

知识方面：了解有关知识；明确危害安全的行为。 能力方面：通过学习，时刻提高警惕，自觉做好防范工作。 觉悟方面：认识安全的必要性，树立安全意识；增强安全的责任感。 教学重点：危害安全的行为，及自救措施。 教学方法：导、读、议、评相结合。 课 时：一课时。 教学流程：

创设情景，导入新课→学生阅读，分析归纳→运用知识，解决问题→小结 教学过程：

分明设情景、导入新课。

一、遵守交通规则，注意人身安全。

了解学生中不遵守交通规则和不注意人身安全的事例。

自由发言。列举学生中不遵守交通规则和不注意人身安全的事例。 总结，并对同学的日常行为提出要求。

二、树立起正确的安全防卫心理,加强安全防卫意识教育，培养正确的安全防卫心理。

1、当前，在中学生中，有一部分学生缺乏正确的安全防卫心理，他们中有人被敲诈，有人被欺负，甚至有人被杀害，此类案件比比皆是，甚至有上升的趋势。因此，对我们中学生加强安全防卫意识教育，培养正确的安全防卫心理非常重要。

2、“害人之心不可有，防人之心不可无。” 采取的应对措施：

第一、要学法、守法、懂法、用法。

第二，要有及时报告的意识。特别是个子矮小，体力单薄的学生遇欺时，要及时报告家长、老师，请求其出面解决。

第三、要有机警的报警意识，即遇危急时临危不惧，寻找脱身之遇，求助于警方帮助。第

四、要谨慎交友。

三、紧急情况下的逃生策略

（一）地震

地震，群灾之首。强烈的破坏性地震瞬间将房屋、桥梁、水坝等建筑物摧毁，直接给人类造成巨大的灾难，还会诱发水灾、火灾、海啸、有毒物质及放射性物质泄漏等次生灾害。

- 1（2）结绳下滑“自救”

在遇上过道或楼梯已经被大火或有毒烟雾封锁后，该怎么办呢？应该及时利用绳子（或者把窗帘、床单撕扯成较粗的长条结成的长带子），将其一端牢牢地系在自来水管或暖气管等能负载体重的物体上，另一端从窗口下垂至地面或较低楼层的阳台处等。然后自己沿着绳子下滑，逃离火场。 （3）向外界求“救”

倘若自己被大火封锁在楼内，一切逃生之路都已切断，那就得暂时退到房内，关闭通向火区的门窗。呆在房间里，并不是消极地坐以待毙。可向门窗浇水，以减缓火势的蔓延；与此同时，通过窗口向下面呼喊、招手、打亮手电筒、抛掷物品等，发出求救信号，等待消防队员的救援。总之，不要因冲动而做出不利于逃生的事。

3．“三不”

（1）“不”乘普通电梯

发现火灾后，人们为了阻止大火沿着电气线路蔓延开来，都会拉闸停电。有时候，大火会将电线烧断。如果乘坐普通电梯逃生，遇上停电可就麻烦了，既上不去，又下不来，无异于将自己困在“囚笼”里 （2）

“不”轻易跳楼

跳楼求生的风险极大，弄不好往往不是死就是伤，不可轻取。即使在万般无奈之际出此下策，也要讲究方法。首先，应该向楼下抛掷棉被或床垫，以便身体着落时不直接与硬的水泥或者石头路面相撞，减少受伤的可能性；然后双手抓住窗沿，身体下垂，双脚落地跳下，缩小与地面的落差。 （3） “不”贪恋财物

火灾来势极快，10分钟后便可进入猛烈的阶段。因此，消防专家警告，遇上火灾时，必须迅速疏散逃生，千万别为穿衣或寻找贵重物品而浪费时间，因为任何珍宝都比不上生命更为珍贵。更不要在已经逃离火场后，为了财物而重返火口，到头来只能是人财两空，自取灭亡。

（三）雷电

夏天来临，经常会有雷雨大风，应该预防雷电袭击。

1.在空旷田野上，不要使自己成为尖端，也就是说，要尽量降低自身高度，不应该把铁锹、锄头、高尔夫球棍等带有金属的物体扛在肩上高过头顶。

2.在市郊地区，最好躲入一栋装有金属门窗或设有避雷针的建筑物内，也可躲进有金属车身的汽车内。3.在稠密树林中，最好找一块林中空地，双脚并拢蹲下；在大树下躲雷雨是极不安全的。此外，不要在高楼烟囱下、地势高的山丘处停留，以防不测。 4.在山间旅游，如路遇山洞也可进入避雷。

5.打雷时，最好不要到湖泊、江河，海滩等处钓鱼和划船，也不要去游泳。

6 .打雷时，在平坦的开阔地带，最好不要骑马、骑自行车、驾驶摩托车或开拖拉机。 7 .打雷时，在室内相对比较安全，但要紧闭门窗，防止危险的侧击雷和球形闪电侵入。

（四）洪水

一个地区短期内连降暴雨，河水会猛烈上涨，漫过堤坝，淹没农田、村庄，冲毁道路、桥梁、房屋，这就是洪水灾害。发生了洪水，如何自救呢？

l．受到洪水威胁，如果时间充裕，应按照预定路线，有组织地向山坡、高地等处转移；在措手不及，已经受到洪水包围的情况下，要尽可能利用船只、木排、门板、木床等，做水上转移。

2．洪水来得太快，已经来不及转移时，要立即爬上屋顶、楼房高屋、大树、高墙，做暂时避险，等待援救。不要单身游水转移。

3．在山区，如果连降大雨，用容易暴发山洪。遇到这种情况，应该注意避免渡河，以防

- 3

第19篇：外研版高一英语必修一教案阅读教学教案（版）

(外研版高一英语必修一示范课教案阅读教学设计)

授课内容：

Module 3 My First Ride on a Train(Reading)

授课教师：方华瑛 授课地点：高一（2）教室

授课时间： 2012年 9月 18日上午10:20---11:05

一、Contents 本模块是通过旅游经历介绍风光，帮助学生学会关于交通工具和地貌等自然现象的词语，学会运用表示过去的用语作回忆、写游记、介绍风光。

二、Teaching Goals 1) Target Language： Pronunciation Stre 1.Words: abandoned caette circus colorful desert diamond expert farm fields helicopter law tram shoot kindergarten product recently scenery supply 2.Phrases: in the central part of, a long-distance train, dark red, until the 1920s, on the coast of, out of date, a dining car, comic books, for the first time, feel nervous, a speed of 3..Grammar : -ed形式作形容词；表达过去时间的词语或词组 4.Function : 礼貌用语

5.Topic : 介绍旅游经历；介绍童年故事 2） Language skills：

Listening : 听懂对事件的回忆、旅游介绍并获取信息

Speaking : 礼貌地进行Everyday English中的对话；运用过去时间回忆；运用含有-ed句子介绍风光

Reading : Scanning, skimming, careful reading, generalization; inference等阅读微技能训练

Writing : 用所学的词汇、词组、及含-ed的句子写介绍旅游情况的文章和各种回忆

3） Learning Strategy： 学生一定程度形成自主学习，有效交际、信息处理、英语思维能力。

认知-- 联系，归纳，推测，速读，略读，查读等技能 , 调控--从同伴处得到反馈，对自己在叙述及作文中的错误进行修改 , 交际--积极、有效同时礼貌地进行对话, 资源--积极有效阅读从网上及各种媒体所获取有关旅游及介绍各地风光的信息 4）Cultural Awarene：了解我国现代化建设的最新成就；了解我国及各地不同的旅游文化

5） Emotion Attitude ：热爱祖国河山；为祖国建设感动自豪；倡导文明礼貌

三、Teaching difficulties and importance：

1 Teaching Important Points：1.如何使用地道英语描述风光、事件或回忆 2.正确理解并应用-ed形容词 3.如何礼貌进行日常对话

Teaching Difficult Points: 能用得体的英语表达自己，描述过去的难忘经历

四、Teaching Methods:基于课程改革的理念及“第二语言习得论”和“整体语言教学”理论，运用任务型教学途径，围绕核心任务，设定小任务，开展促进自主性学习的课堂活动，强调合作探究与独立思考相结合，初步设计“P—T—P”自主学习立体模式：（Pre-task----Task-cycle----Post-task）。

五、Dealing with teaching materials: Task：学生能利用照片、明信片、纪念品等向同伴介绍旅游情况。三个环节如下：

Pre-task: 学生回忆往事，激活背景知识，重温情感体验 Task-cycle: 通过整个模块听说读写的训练，强化“描述风光或一件难忘的事”的表达及语篇能力，为完成任务做好铺垫

Post-task: 达成任务，展示成果，反馈学习情况。

六、Design Ss=students; T=teacher; group work; pair work; individual work;screen

Period 2 Reading Ⅰ、Contents and Aims

1、学习在澳大利亚乘火车旅游的文章

2、训练速读、略读和查读技能，通过中心句掌握全文中心，学会分析文章结构， 学会运用想象、联想、逻辑分析和英语思维的能力

3、学会如何描述乘火车旅游的情形 Ⅱ、Teaching Procedures Step1: Lead-in (5m) 1.Show the students some pictures of means of transportation.2.Ask them to discu what they are and what is his/ her favorite.3.Ask them to give more examples of means of transport and recall his/her trip to a place.Step2: Pre- reading task Content Prediction(8m) 1.According to the picture and the title, try to predict what we will be able to learn from the paage.(2m) 2.Task-cycle Reading(6m) Pre-reading Map reading Look at the map of the railways in Australia, discu which city you would like to travel and how to get there.Step3: While-reading (5m)

Activity 1 First ( Fast ) reading Match: Find out what main idea each paragraph is about.( my first ride on a long-distance train, the food, the paenger, the Ghan ) Step4: Careful reading (20m)

A .Find main sentence in each paragraph.B .Main idea C.Guide Ss to find out the structure of the paage.

2 Activity 2 Second ( Detailed ) reading Deal with 6 questions in (4) Activity 3 Third reading ( Reading Strategies Applying ) A.Find out appropriate information to fill in the form below: Part One (1) Who When Where What Why How Part Two (2-3) Food Scenery First hundred kms After that Suddenly B.Put me in the right order and form a paage, adding in the time signals.Camels were trained to carry supplies back from the central part.Camels were shot because of the new railway line built by the government.They brought camels from Afghanistan.Australians needed a way to the central country.They tried riding horses, but failed.C.Word-gueing ( abandon, diamond, supplies) Step5:Post-task (6m) Activity 1 Retelling Retell the paage with the help of the form Activity 2 Discuion P24 Activity 3 Small debate “They should shot the camels”

Recalling Recall what we learn today.& Questions unsolved.Step6 : Homework(1m) Write a reading note

Title__________________________ Module _________ Date___________ General idea： Words & Phrases: BS: BS=beautiful sentences Task Learn and retell the paage

高考英语《完型填空》示范课教案教学设计

授课内容：

《15 分钟高效完型填空之技巧》

授课教师：方华瑛 授课地点：高三（13）

授课时间： 2009年 3月 10日上午 10:00--- 10:45 Teaching Goals：

一．完形填空题的命题特点

A.加强在分析语境的过程中对逻辑 意义理解能力的考查。 B.对在具体语境中词汇的意义与用法的考查。 C.对通篇理解、全方位思考问题的能力的考查。

Ability

Goals 二．重要性《普通高中英语课程标准（实验）》明确提出“高中阶段要着重提高学生用英语获取信息和处理信息，分析问题和解决问题的能力”，这就要求学生要不断地提高相应的阅读技能。 Skills

三．新课标规定的阅读技能测试要点如下：

1． 理解主旨大意; 2． 寻读具体信息； 3． 理解细节；

4． 根据上下文提供语境推测生词词义，进而加深对文段的理解；

5． 简单的判断和推理； 6． 理解文段的基本逻辑结构；

7． 理解作者的意图和态度； 8． 理解文段的文化信息。

测试方式共有11种，而其中的完形填空也是历届高考必有的题型之一，所占分值比例较大，并且由于在试卷中所处的位置较前，因此如何能在15分钟短时间内更好的完成这类试题对考生的影响较大：完形填空做得好，则考生对后面的试题就越有信心。

四．解题思路 第一

宏观认识 第二

微观处理

1.细读首句，判断文体并大胆预测文章的主题。 2.段首与段尾的结合。

4 3.逻辑推理，判断选择空白处要填的答案

①争取主动。

②固定短语搭配。

③从上下文中寻找解题线索。

第

三、核对答案，反复推敲再通读全文，检查还原了的短文是否完整合理。

Teaching Important Points : 1 Master and understand how to deal with the main idea of the paage

2.Develop students’ ability of catch the main idea of the paage

Teaching Difficult Points : How to help the students understand the text quickly.2.How to help the students catch the main idea of the paage.Teaching

procedures Step 1 Lead-in

以NMET 2008（浙江卷）完形填空为例，大家一起探讨从中发现的一些解题技巧。

Step 2 Discuion 通过例题大家讨论每个同学解此类题常用的一些方法：

（一）前后呼应法

做完形填空时，要始终抓住文章本身，联系“双语境”来判断，既大语境——全文中心和基调，小语境——空格前后句子所构成的语境；再根据前有伏笔后有呼应的思路来做题。如：

第21题 B，根据后面作者所回忆的事情来判断，他的父亲带给他的应是爱与欢乐，所以选B: joy ，而其他选项都没有给出相应的事情来呼应。

第22题 D, 由这一段的最后一句“he loved to fish;”及第三段的第一句“But I never really liked being on the water, the way my father did.”可知父亲喜欢水及一些水上活动。因此第23题也就能很快找到正确答案是A: boat。

第30题 B，由后面两句可得知父亲会在休息时过来看“我”，特别后面提到“My father would stand there in his suit, ” 同样这儿用would更合理。

第32题 D，这一段是讲作者在游泳后到他父亲的办公室里玩耍。与后面的“sit on the wooden chair in front of his big desk”相呼应。

第33题 C，与35题所在的句子“--- perhaps I shouldn’t be playing with his _35__.”相呼应，因此35题的答案也能从33题“--- where he let me __33__anything I found in

5 his top desk drawer.”中推断出是C。

第38题 C，由文章大意可知道父亲应是十分爱“我”的，所以有时还会给“我”钱买冰淇淋吃。这是与文章的大语境相呼应的。

第39题 A，作者认为不仅是我们童年所看到的事物决定了我们的记忆，而且还包括那时关爱我们的人。所以诗人所说的“the rest”就应该是memory与下一句的“determines our memories”相呼应。

（二）But 转折法

在完形填空题中，but 一词前后通常会设题。文中一出现but，应该马上想到前后语意有转折，只要知道其中一方的语意，就可以推出另一方的意思，所以在做题时，遇到类似but的词，如：however, neverthele, whereas, yet等，也可以同样处理，以便于从文中找到解题的依据。仍旧以NMET 2008（浙江卷）完形填空为例：

第25题 D，由这一段的第一句“But I never really liked being on the water, he way my father did”.及后面的“moving through it,”可知“I liked being in the water.”

第37题 A, 当父亲的学生或助手认为“我”不应该玩他办公室里的东西时，父亲却总是轻松地表示没有关系。所以第37题答案很明显是A : fine。

（三）绝对矛盾法

绝对矛盾法是从选项着手分析，若四个选项中有两个选项是绝对矛盾和对立，那么正确选项大多在这两个对立项之间产生。二者必居其一.至于究竟是两者中的哪一个，则需要进一步根据上下文的语境来判断。例如在《浙江省湖州中学教学讲义高一英语模块

一、二》（2008，9）第120页，完形填空第二段：

Most computers have a memory(存储器).They can work millions of times ___3____ than man.That means information can be put in ___4____ and be taken out any time when needed.

第3题的选项分别是A.slow B.slower C.fast D.faster

6 据观察应选用比较级，所以先排除A和C，在根据后面的一句及我们的常识可知，电脑的工作效率要比人快，所以在B，D这两个对立项中，自然就可以很轻松地把正确答案D选出来了。

又如第90页的完形填空：

The Great Wall, one of the greatest wonders of the world, was enlisted in the World Heritage in 1987.Just ___1__ a dragon, it winds its way from east to west of China.With a history of more than 2000 years.Some sections are now in ruins or even entirely___2___ .

第2题的选项分别是A.appeared B.mied C.went D.disappeared 显然A和D 是对立项，根据题意可知长城的一些部分已经破败不堪，甚至完全消失，故答案就是D.disappeared 。

（四）同义复现法

同义复现是英语中常见的一种现象。为强调某一意思，但又不想重复使用某个词或短语。在完形填空题中，同义词或同义短语的位置多半比较靠近，很容易找到，所以同义复现法是很好的解题技巧。无须过多的推理，只需确定是哪里使用了同义复现，然后从选项中找出与之相符合的一项即可。

Step 4 Guide 无论是哪种形式的阅读技能检测，只有在平时的课堂教学中扎实学生的语言基础，才使学生稳步提高用英语获取信息，处理信息，发现问题和解决问题的能力。无法想象一位词汇贫乏，语法不通，句子结构不清的学生能在完形填空题中得高分。所以作为教师的我们有义务从小处着手，从细节做起，逐渐地培养学生的解题能力。具体可以从以下几点做起：

（一） 词汇分类

可以单元或模块为单位，把其中的近义词，反义词等归类，这样就能使学生在遇到有同义反复或绝对矛盾题型时，更快地找到正确的答案。 如在Book 1里就有这样一些近义词或词组：opinion, view; destroy, damage; as if, as though; be concerned about, care about; right away, at once 等。反义词或词组有：generous, mean; selfish, selfle; equal, unfair; be fond of, be tired of; think highly of, think little of等。

（二） 句子衔接

7 注意句子和句子之间的衔接，可应用不同的连接词连接相同的两个句子，观察其产生的意义有何不同。在平时的阅读中也可以指导学生善于发现句子和句子或段落和段落之间的连接词，并适时对连接词进行总结和归类。例如：

表示并列的有：and, too, what’s more, in addition, as well as等；

表示因果的有：because, since, so that, therefore, as a result等；

表示转折或对比的有：while, however, on one hand…on the other hand等；

表示总结的有： all in all, in a word, in conclusion等。

明白了句子与句子之间的关系，学生就能更快地理解文章的主旨，也能从细节中更有把握地推断出一些有用的信息。

（三） 讲究策略

做完形填空的速度不能太慢，一般要在15分钟内完成，否则有可能会造成后面的试题来不及做。那些平时习惯于逐个单词阅读的学生，容易造成思维中断，不能快速把握文章的主旨，因此教师要帮助其纠正这种不良的阅读方法和习惯。良好的阅读习惯不仅要求学生快速把握文章大意，也要求其在阅读过程中注重细节，特别要正确把握反映作者观点和态度的细节。教师可以通过引导学生对反映细节的文字加以理解与概括，培养学生分析、概括、演绎和归纳的能力，从而达到既不忽视文章细节，又能正确把握文章中心思想的能力。有了良好的阅读技能，学生不仅能在做完形填空时游刃有余，而且还能从整体上提高英语考试的成绩。

Step 5 Strategy

1.首先，大家要以很快的速度浏览全文，掌握文章的主旨，抓住篇章的主要线索，为其后的解题创造良好的条件，建立篇章的整体概念。因此，第一遍浏览时，大家不要急于看选项。浏览全文时要重点了解文中所叙述的人物、时间、地点、事件，即who，when，where，what。完形填空命题的原则一般是第一句话不挖空，目的是使读者进入语境，因此一定要认真阅读这句话，大家可以透过首句的“窗口”看篇章的整个“世界”。例如：Why is a space left between the rails of a railway line where one piece joins the next﹖这句话从铁轨之间的缝隙引出了问题。根据常识，文中内容应与热涨冷缩的物理现象有关。

2.根据故事情节的发展选词，确定所填的词与文中哪个词有关系以及动作是在什么场合发生的。切记要从整体来看问题，要“瞻前顾后”。

3.试填之后将所选定的词放到文章中复读检查。(“字面译、通逻辑、搞代入、全文译”)

具体操作中应注意以下几个的问题

一、从单句中选择答案。

这是完形填空考查项目设计最简单的一种。它相当于一道单项选择题，它不需要通过上下文，而是读它本句即能判断出正确答案。例如：MET90完形填空中的第一句

While my father was an officer of the British army in South Africa, we lived in a41 house.四个选项分别为：A.two-storeyed B.two -storeyed C.two-storeys D.two storeys 只要学过构词法，考生很容易就能选出正确答案是A。不过该考查项在完形填空的设计中所占的比例很小。

二、寻找信息词或信息选择答案。

在一篇完形填空文章中，就一句所言，很难确定正确的答案。若继续读下去，就能发现与问题有关的信息词或信息句子出现，这些词或句往往是直接或间接地提示出正确的答案。如NMET95完形填空开头的一段。

Washoe is a young chimpanzee(黑猩猩).She is no41 chimpanzee, though.Scientists are doing a research 42 her.They want to see how civilized(驯化)she can 43 .Already she does many things a human being can do. 41.A.foolish B.ordinary C.special D.simple 42.A.for B.by C.to D.on

43.A.experience B.change C.develop D.become

这篇文章的第一个空格，若按照“单句理解”的方法去解答，显然不行。此段中的最后一句“Already she does many things a human being can do”是信息句，它暗示我们这是一只非同寻常的大猩猩，正确答案显然是B。

空42的答案，可以按照上下文，特别是空41的信息词no ordinary，说明科学家们正在这只动物身上做一些研究工作。因此选D.on是最佳答案。

空43的答案，按照上下文，从意义上看，似乎B.change和C.develop

9 D.become都是正确的答案。但本句中civilized是个信息词，它在本句中是过去分词作形容词，作how引导的宾语从句中某个系动词的表语，很显然，答案是D.become。

三、根据词的固定搭配和固定句型来选择答案。

词的固定搭配，特别是动词的搭配和词语类型试题是完形填空测试的重点，多数题目涉及到动词的语法和各种搭配关系，这是由动词在句子中的重要性决定的。动词在搭配关系上与名词、介词、副词紧密相连，测试的范围较广。这就要求考生多读、多记，对所学短语动词能牢固掌握，并能灵活运用。

四、通过上下文来选择答案。

该项目的设计主要是考查考生的综合分析能力。测试内容包括篇章结构和推理判断能力，这些答案的选择，起关键作用的是上下文的关系，也就是说，对短文的理解是非常重要的，这种考查项目的设计所占的比例较大，且难度也大，若从单句或“局部”来分析，所给的四个答案在语法或结构上都是正确的，若放在全局，则不一定正确。考生必须通过部分上下文甚至全文才能选出正确的答案来。

如MET89完形填空中的一句，The dog seemed to47 his mushrooms and the officers then began to eat their meal, saying that the mushrooms had a very strange 48 (but)quite pleasant taste.选择项：

A.refuse B.hate C.want D.enjoy

此句的答案只有看了后文的信息词“began to eat”和“saying...”来判断，enjoy是最恰当的用词，符合当时的情景，而want显然程度不够，逻辑关系也不严密。再如MET92完形填空中的一句，55 the kettle of boiling water, she moved quietly 56 (towards) the door。。。

A: putting down B.laying aside C.picking up D.taking away

若从文章开头读到这里，很难判断老太太发现有情况后，如何处理“the kettle”，只有将这一自然段读完后，才知老太太是“picking up the kettle”，即“提起壶”，不然她怎能将开水倒向小偷的手呢?

五、通过文章深层意义的理解选择答案。

通过文章深层意义来选择答案，是完形填空难度最大的一种形式。它要求考生不仅要有广

10 博的知识、丰富的生活经历，还要求学生们能够驾驭全文，不仅理解文章的表层意义，而且要弄清文章的深层意义。如NMET94完形填空的第一句：

It was an early morning in summer.In the street, sleeply-eyed people were moving quickly, heading towards their 41

A.jobs B.homes C.buses D.offices

从信息词“early morning”和“sleepy-eyed”来判断，B.homes不符合逻辑，按生活经验，他们是去上班。这时有些考生就会认为，既然上班，就要去“挤公交车”或“去办公室”。但上班的人也有步行的、骑车的或坐地铁的，也有自己开车去的。人们上班有去农场、煤矿，露天码头，还有工厂车间，不一定去办公室。因此，C.buses和D.offices不符合现实生活，只有A.jobs最合乎生活实际，人们起床后，各自奔向自己的工作岗位。 Step 6 Drill and Home

下面请同学们试着按照老师的解题提示去完成下面这篇介绍美国素有NBA篮球“小皇帝”之称詹姆士.勒布朗。

James isn\'t the first high school basketball player to go straight into the NBA, but he\'s probably the best.he has the body, skills and the basketball brain of an all-star (全明星球员).this ___1____ was on ___2____ as he scored 41 points to take clever land cavaliers (克里夫兰骑士队) to a 107-104 win over the new jersey nets (新泽西网队) on march 28.aged of 19 years and 87 days, James became the ___3 ____ player to score 40 or more in the NBA.\"it was by far James\' best ____4___ ,\" said clever land coach Paul Silas.

known to his friends ____5___ \"the king\", this was the day James earned his crown(王冠).but he was ____6___ from being a king during a childhood spent in the back streets of Akron, Ohio.____7___ many other African-American basketball 11 players, James\' early years were a ____8 ___ .his mother Gloria was just 16 when she gave birth to him; he knows nothing about his father.mother and son battled for everything from food to a place to live.____9 ___ help from his grandmother and neighbors, James would ___10 ____ have died when he was young.this spirit of survival has served him well on court, forcing him to take any ____11___ he finds.\"i ____12___ losing, i don\'t like losing,\" said James of his 41-point display.\"I___13____ the opportunity for us to win and i was ____14___ to capture it.\" at 2.03 meters, he is no Yao Ming but this didn\'t ___15____ him being first choice in 2003 draft.this was ____16 ___ to his strength and skill, much of which he learned from high school American football.

although he has a ___ 17____ brain ,James has never had to concentrate on ___18____ .some people think this is a mistake and say he should have gone to college to ____19___ his mind.But James is one of the lucky few who has found fame and fortune ___20____ a diploma (文凭).on the court, he is king. 1.a.performance b.activity c.action d.talent 2.a.sale b.exhibition c.show d.duty 3.a.oldest b.strongest c.tallest d.youngest 4.a.performance b.leon c.action d.appearance 5.a.for b.as c.by d.with 6.a.well b.far c.deep d.late 7.a.as b.like c.likely d.alike 8.a.fight b.struggle c.battle d.war

12 9.a.except for b.except c.besides d.without 10.a.certainly b.impoible c.hardly d.probably 11.a.goal b.game c.match d.chance 12.a.hate b.refuse c.object d.reject 13.a.grasped b.seized c.caught d.held 14.a.afraid b.unlucky c.able d.certain 15.a.keep b.forbid c.protect d.stop

16.a.according b.referring c.thanks d.sticking 17.a.fast b.quick c.high d.top

18.a.studying b.resting c.sleeping d.eating 19.a.advance b.march c.increase d.develop 20.a.apart from b.but c.except d.without 答案与解析：

这是一篇介绍美国素有NBA篮球“小皇帝”之称詹姆士.勒布朗成长历程的短文。詹姆士.勒布朗，新一代的NBA篮球王。他，取胜欲望强，得分能力高，把握机会好，简直是一个全才.获得2006年全明星赛MVP(最有价值球员)。然而这位年轻的篮球天才的成长过程也充满了艰辛，可谓一路\"挣扎\"。

1.d 。talent是“天才”或“天赋”的意思.2.c 。 3月28日当他带领克里夫兰骑士队以107：104击败新泽西网队时这种能力显示了出来，在这场比赛中他一人独得41分。这种能力指上文所提的全明星球员在身体、技术和智力方面的综合素质。

3.d 。 由上文提到的19岁87天反推该空强调James 年纪轻。

4.a 。 一场比赛个人得分过40分或更多是一种好的表现。

13 5.b 。 known as，\"作为......是有名的\"，符合题意。

6.b 。 由下文介绍的童年时期不幸生活反推，那时他还远不是一个球王。

7.b 。 分析语境可知，该空表\"像......一样\"，应填like。

8.b 。 由下文所介绍的童年不幸生活反推，James的童年生活是一种挣扎。

9.d 。without是介词在这里表示“如果没有”的意思，充当条件状语。 10.d。 没有祖母和邻居的帮助，James也许很小的时候就死了。

11.d 。take any chance，\"利用机会\"，符合题意。

12.a 。下文的don\'t like暗示该空应填hate。

13.b 。seize the opportunity，\"抓住机会\"，与语境逻辑相符。

14.c 。分析语境可知，该空表\"能够\"，应填able。

15.d 。stop sb.(from) doing sth.，\"阻止某人做某事\"，符合题意。若将stop 改为keep，from不可省，所以a错误。

16.c 。分析语境可知，该空表\"多亏了\"，应填thanks。

17.b 。强调\"聪明的、反应快的\"，应用quick，而不用fast。

18.a 。下文的college暗示该空应填studying。

19.d 。上大学的目的是开发智力，因此该空应填develop。

20.d 。James成了没有文凭而成名的幸运者。

第20篇：高一英语必修一知识点总结

高一英语各单元知识点总结及重难点解析 ☆重点句型☆

1.What should a friend be like? 询问对方的看法 2.I think he / she should be„表示个人观点的词语

3.I enjoy reading / I'm fond of singing / I like playing computer games.等表示喜好的词语 4.Chuck is on a flight when suddenly his plane crashes. “when"作并列连词的用法 5.What / Who / When / Where is it that...? 强调句的

特殊疑问句结构

6.With so many people communicating in English everyday, ...“with+宾语+宾补”的结构做状语 7.Can you tell me how to pronounce...? 带连接副词

(或代词)的不定式做宾补的用法 ☆重点词汇☆

1.especially

v.

特别地 2.imagine

v.

想像

3.alone

adv./ adj.

单独，孤独的 4.interest

n.

兴趣

5.everyday

adj.

每天的，日常的 6.deserted

adj.

抛弃的 7.hunt

v.搜寻 8.share

v.分享

9.care

v.在乎，关心 10.total

n.总数 11.majority

n.大多数

12.survive

v.生存，活下来 13.adventure

n.冒险 14.scared

adj.吓坏的 15.admit

v.承认

16.while

conj.但是，而 17.boring

adj.令人厌烦的 18.except

prep.除„„之外 19.quality

n.质量

20.favourite

adj.最喜爱的 ☆重点短语☆

1.be fond of

爱好

2.treat„as„

把„„看作为„„ 3.make friends with 与„„交朋友

4.argue with sb.about / over sth.

与某人争论某事 5.hunt for

寻找 6.in order to

为了

7.share„with

与„„分享 8.bring in

引进；赚钱 9.a great / good many

许多„

10.have difficulty (in) doing

做„„有困难 11.end up with

以„„结束 12.except for

除„„之外 13.come about

发生

1 14.make(a)fire

生火

15.make yourself at home

别拘束 16.the majority of

大多数

17.drop sb.a line

给某人写短信 18.for the first time

第一次 19.at all

根本；竟然

20.have a (good) knowledge of„

精通„„ ☆短语闯关☆

下列短语都是这两个单元学过的重要短语，请你根据汉语在横线上填人一个正确的词，每个词4分，80分才能过关，你一定能过关，做好了闯关的准备吗?那么我们就开始吧? l.be fond ____

喜欢，爱好

2.hunt ____

搜索。追寻，寻找

3.in to ____

为了

4.care ____

担心，关心

5.such ____

例如，诸如

6.drop sb a ____

给某人写信(通常指写短信)

7.make oneself at ____

别客气

8.____ total

总共

9.except ____

除了„„之外

10.stay ____

不睡，熬夜

11.____ about

发生

12.end ____ with

以„„告终

13.bring ____

引进，引来

14.a great ____

许许多多，极多

15.be ____

对„„深感兴趣，深深迷上„„

16.____ the Internet

上网

17.____ claes

逃学，逃课

18.get ____

聚会，相聚，聚集

19.be proud ____

为„„感到骄傲

20.keep an ____ on

照看，注意

21.be curious ____

对„„感到好奇

22.shut ____

(使)住口

23.joke ____

开玩笑

24.____ the name of

以„„名义

25.____ the time

总是，一直

☆交际用语☆ 1.I think…

I like / love / hate...

I enjoy...

My interests are...2.Did you have a good flight?

You must be very tired.

Just make yourself at home.

I beg your pardon?

of for order about as line home

in

for up come

up in many into surf skip

together of eye about up about in all

Can you tell me how to pronounce...?

Get it.☆单词聚焦☆

1.argue v.的用法

▲构词：argument n.1.[C]争论 2.[U]讨论．辩论3.[C]论据 ▲ 搭配：

① argue with / against sb.over / on / about sth.与某人

争论某事 ② argue for / against sth.辩论赞成／反对某事 ③ argue that...主张，认为，争辩说

④ argue sb into / out of doing sth.说服某人做／不做某事

▲友情提示：“说服某人做／不做某事”还可表达为：talk / persuade / reason sb.into / out of doing sth.⑤ settle the argument 解决争端

▲友情提示：an argument with sb about / over sth.为某事和某人而发生的争执

【考例】What laughing ____ we had about the socially respectable method for moving spaghetti (意大利式细面条) from plate to mouth.

(2004全国卷I)

A.speeches

B.leons C.sayings D.arguments [考查目标] argue名词形式的词义。

[答案与解析] D argument的词义是“争辩，辩论”。 2.compare v.的用法

▲构词：comparison n.比较

▲搭配：① compare...to...比拟；比作 ② compare...with / to...将„„和„„相比较 ③ compare notes 对笔记；交换意见

【考例】 ____ with the size of the whole earth, the biggest ocean does not seem big at all.(2004湖北)

A.Compare

B.When comparing

C.Comparing

D.When compared [考查目标] compare的用法。

[答案与解析] D 本句compare用在句首作状语，并有“被比较”的意思。 3.consider v.的用法

▲构词：consideration n.考虑，思考；体谅，顾及

▲搭配：① consider doing sth.考虑做某事 ② consider sb (to be / as)...认为／觉得某人„„③ consider that- clause 认为„„ ④ take sth into consideration 考虑 ⑤ under consideration 在考虑中

【考例】Charles Babbage is generally considered ____ the first computer. (NMET 1993)

A.to invent

B.inventing

C.to have invented

D.having invented [考查目标] consider的几种常见用法。

[答案与解析] C consider本身是被动语态时，后接不定式的各种结构。如果表示已经发生的事情．用不定式的完成形式。

4.deserted adj.空无一人的；被遗弃的；被抛弃的

(1) 空无一人的a deserted street / area空无一人的街道，地区；The office was quite deserted.办公室里空无一人。

(2) 被遗弃的

a deserted child 被遗弃的孩子 (3) desert ['dezot] n.沙漠 desert [dI'zo:t] vt.丢弃；遗弃

He deserted his wife and children after becoming rich.5.difficulty n.

(1) difficulty (通常作复数) 难事，难点，难题She met with many difficulties when travelling.

(2) 在以下句型中，difficulty是不可数名词，不能用复数形式。

have (some) difficulty (in) doing sth.

干某事有困难 there is (some) difficulty (in) doing sth.

have (some) difficulty with sth.

在某事上有困难

there is (some) difficulty with sth.

do sth.with difficulty / without difficulty 困难地／轻而易举地做某事

We had a lot of difficulty in finding your house.

Do you have any difficulty with your English?

【注意】

(1) 以上句型中，difficulty前可加some, little, much, a lot of, no, any修饰

(2) 以上句型中，亦可用trouble来代替difficulty。 6.favourite = favorite (A.E) 最喜爱的；最喜爱的人或事物

(1) adj.最喜爱的My favorite sport is playing football.

(2) n.[C] 最喜爱的人或事物He is a favorite with his uncle.7.fun的用法

▲构词：funny adj.有趣的．滑稽的，好笑的；奇特的，古怪的 ▲搭配：

① make fun of 取笑；嘲弄；开某人的玩笑

② (just)for / in fun = (just) for the fun of it 取乐，非认真地，说／做着玩的 ③ be full of fun„„ 很好玩

④ have fun with sb.和某人开一个玩笑

⑤ have (some) fun 玩得(很)高兴，玩得(很)开心

⑥ It's (great) fun to do sth干某事很有趣；干某事真是一件趣事；干某事真开心 ⑦ What fun (it is) to do sth! 干某事多么有趣呀! ⑧ have a lot of fun doing sth 干某事玩得很开心

【考例】 (200上海春招) This is not a match.We're play- ing che just for ____.

A.habit

B.hobby

C.fun

D.game [考查目标] fun构成的短语for fun的意思。

[答案与解析]C，for fun 常在句中用作状语，意思是“说／做着玩的”。 8.imagine的用法

▲构词：① imagination n.[C / U] 想像，想像力，想像的事物 ② imaginative adj.富有想像力的 ▲搭配：① imagine sth / doing sth ② beyond (all) imagination (完全)出乎意料地

【考例】 I can hardly imagine Peter ___acro the Atlantic Ocean in five days. (MET 1991)

A.sail

B.to sail

C.sailing

D.to have sailed [考查目标] imagine的基本用法。

[答案与解析] C imagine后接动词的-ing形式，本句的Peter是这个动名词的逻辑主语。 9.interest的用法

interest vt.使„„感兴趣 n.兴趣，爱好 [U] 利息；利润 He has a great interest in politics.他对政治极感兴趣。/ a broad interest 广泛的利益 / a common interest 共同的利益 / a strong interest 极强的兴趣

▲构词：① interesting 令人感兴趣的(事物) ② interested (某人对某事)有兴趣的 ▲搭配：① interest sb in sth 使某人注意，关心或参入某事；使某人对某事感兴趣 ② be interested in 对„„感兴趣(关

4 心) ③have an interest in sth./ in doing sth.对某方面有兴趣 (关心)；在„„中有股份、权益等 ④ hold one's interest 吸引住某人的兴趣 ⑤ in the interest(s) of 为„„利益；为„„起见；对„„有利 ⑥ lose interest in 对„„不再感兴趣 ⑦ show / take (an) interest in / in doing sth.对„„表示关心(有兴趣) ⑧ have / take / feel no interest in 对„„不 (不太) 感兴趣 ⑨ with interest 有兴趣地，津津有味地 ⑩develop / find / feel interest in sth./ in doing sth.在某方面培养／有兴趣 ? lose interest in sth./ in doing sth.对某方面失去兴趣 有时interest可与不定冠词连用。He developed an interest in science.另外：interest作“爱好”解时，是可数名词。 His interests include reading and tennis.【考例】____, they immediately suggested that she put them together to make a single one long story and paid Tracy a $50,000 advance.(2004全国卷 II)

A.Interested

B.Anxiously

C.Seriously

D.Encouraged [考查目标] interest派生词的词义和用法。

[答案与解析] A interested指(出版商)对这件事有兴趣。 10.prove的用法

▲构词：① proof n.证据。试验，考验，(印刷)校样

▲搭配：① prove sth to sb 向某人证实„„ ② prove to sb that 从句向某人证实„„ ③ prove (oneself) to be 证明(自己)是，表现出

【考例】It was in the neighboring country — United States that such resistance to spray was first ____.(05长春模拟)

A.proved

B.killed

C.thought

D.discued [考查目标] 考查prove的意思。

[答案与解析] A 本题was proved的意思是“得到证实”，有被动意味。 11.provide的用法

▲构词：① provider n.供给者，供应者，养家者 ② provided / providing conj.倘若 ▲搭配：provide sb with sth / sth to sb 给„„提供；以„„装备

【考例】His son ____ the old man with all the food and the money he needed.

A.provided

B.fed

C.afforded

D.charred [考查目标]考查provide的词义。

[答案与解析]A provide与with搭配，意思是“向某人提供某物”。 12.share的用法

▲搭配：① share (in) sth.with sth.和某人分享、分担、共用某物 ② share sth (out) between / among...将某物分配、分给„„ ③ share joys / happine and sorrows (with sb) (和某人) 同甘共苦 ④ share one's opinion 同意某人的意见 【考例】Let Harry play with your toys as well, Clare — you must learn to ____.(NMET 2000)

A.support

B.care

C.spare

D.share [考查目标] 此题主要考查在语境中选择动词的能力。

[答案与解析] D 四个选项的含义分别为：support 支持；care 在意，关心；spare 挤出(时间)，匀出某物；share分享，分担，与某人合用。根据语境可知说话者是想让Clare学会与人共享——把玩具(拿出来)和Harry一起玩，share在此意为“合用玩具”，解此题的关键是信息play with your toys as well。故D为最佳答案。 13.solve的用法

▲构词：solution n.1.[C] (问题的)解答；(困难的)解决方法 2.[U] 解答，解决 3.[U] 溶解 ▲搭配：the solution to 解决„„的办法

【考例3】In the end, one suggestion seems to be the solution ____ the problem. (2001北京春招)

A.with

B.into C.for

D.to [考查目标] solve名词solution的相关搭配。 [答案与解析] D “对于„„的解决办法”，介词用to。

5 14.total n./ adj.全部(的)

(1) in total 加起来In total, there must have been 20000 people there.

(2) a total of 总共His expenses (支出) reached a total of $100.

(3) the total of...„„的总数 The total 0f the bill is 230 dollars.15.when conj.

when并列连词，= and then，表示“就在那时，突然”，常见以下句型中：

(1) be doing...when...正在做„„突然„„I was wandering through the streets when l caught sight of a tailor's shop.

(2) had done...when...刚做了„„突然„„I had just sat down when the light went out.

(3) be about to do...when...刚要做„„突然„„I was just about to go swimming when our guide saw me and shouted at me.16.while conj.

(1) while从属连词，引导时间状语从句，从句动词用延续性动词，主句的动作发生在从句动作发生的过程之中。Come on, get these things away while I make the tea.

(2) 并列连词，表前后两个分句意义相反或相对，意为“然而”。Some people waste food while others haven't enough.

(3) 放在句首，表示“尽管；虽然”，相当于although。While we don't agree, we continue to be friendly.[牛刀小试1] 用所给单词的适当形式填空：

(compare，interest，fun，solve，argue，consider，share) 1.All the novels are considered ____ the young readers in the 1980s.(to have interested) 2.Bob thought it ____ to solve maths problems while others hated it.(fun) 3.The headmaster ignored the ____ between Mrs.Wang and his nephew.(argument) 4.We can't decide.The plan needs to be ____.(considered) 5.____ with Cla Two, ours has more boy students.(Compared) 6.I find a better way ____ this problem.(to solve) 7.Nearly half of the companies ____ the same opinion with the government.(share / shared) 【词语比较】

1.especially, specially

especially adv.特殊地；尤其是

(1)侧重于多种事物或人中比较突出的。I like all the subjects at school, especially English.(尤其是英语)

(2) especially 后可接介词短语或从句。I like the Yuelu Mountains, especially in spring.(尤其是在春天) Noise is unpleasant, especially when you are trying to sleep.

specially 侧重特意地、专门地做某事 (后面常接for sb.或to do sth.) I made a chocolate cake specially for you.2. boring, bored, bore boring adj.令人厌烦的 The book is very boring.

bored adj.感到厌烦的 I'm bored with the book.

bore vt.令人厌烦

This book bores me.

有些表示情感的及物动词，有与bore类似的用法。如：interest, excite, surprise, amaze, frighten, astonish, move, inspire, touch, scare, disappoint, puzzle, worry 这类词的现在分词形式，为“令人„„”；过去分词形式，为“感到„„”。 3.except for, except, but, besides

表示“除了”的词或短语有：except; but; except for; besides; except that (when...) 等。

(1) except 和 but 都表示“除了„„之外。没有”，二者大多数情况下可以互换；但在no, all, nobody, nothing, no one 等词后多用 but。No one knows our teacher's addre except / but him.(排除him)

(2) besides 除„„之外，还„„，有附加性。What other foreign languages do you know besides English? (English与other languages都属于know的范围)

(3) except for 只不过„„，整体肯定，部分修正，用于排除非同类事物，for表示细节上的修正。 Your article is well written except for a few spelling mistakes.4.know, know of, know about

(1) know 用作动词，意思是“(直接地)获知，懂得，认识，熟悉”。I don't know whether he is here or not./ I know him to be honest.

(2) know of和know about的意思都是“(间接地)获知”，指听别人说到或从书报上看到，二者没有什么区别。 5.for example; such as

(1) for example“例如”，用来举例说明某一论点或情况。一般只举同类人或物中的“一个”为例，作插入语，可位于句首、句中或句末。可用for instance替换。For example, air is invisible./ His spelling is terrible! Look at this word, for example.

(2) such as “例如”，用来列举事物，一般列举同类人或事物中的几个例子。插在被列举的事物与前面的名词之间，as后面不可有逗号。Some of the European Languages come from Latin, such as French, Italian and Spanish.

[注意]如把前面所述情况全部举出，用that is或namely。 ☆短语归纳☆ 1.含all的短语

1) first of all

首先 (强调顺序) 2) in all (=in total=altogether)

总共 3) after all

毕竟，终究 4) at all

到底，根本

5) above all

最重要的是 (强调重要性) 6) not (...) at all (= not (...) in the least)

根本不，一点也不 7) all the time

始终，一直

8) all of a sudden (=suddenly)

突然，冷不防 9) all right

行，可以

10) all at once

立刘，马上

11) all day and all night

日日夜夜 12) all over

遍及

13) all alone

独个儿，独立地 14) all but

几乎，差一点 15) all in all

总的说来

16) all together

一道，同时，总共 17) for all

尽管

[例句] I woke up and didn't hear him at all.我醒了，一点儿也没有听到他说话。/ He had so many falls that he was black and blue all over.他摔了很多跤，以至于浑身青一块紫一块的。/ You shouldn't scold her.After all, she is only five years old.你不应该责怪他，毕竟，她只有五岁。/ Children need many things, but above all, they need love.孩子需要许多东西，最重要的是，需要爱。/ You must have known it all the time.你一定一直知道这事。 【考例】 People may have different opinions about Karen, but I admire her.____, she is a great musician.(2004甘肃、青海)

A.After all B.As a result C.In other words D.As usual [考查目标] 主要考查四个短语的用法。

[答案与解析] A after all意为“毕竟．终究”；as a result意为“结果”；in other words意为“换句话说”；as usual意为“像往常一样”。本句意思是：虽然人们对她看法不一。但我还是佩服她。因为她毕竟是一个伟大的音乐家。 【考例】I'd like to buy a house -- modern, comfortable, and ____ in a quiet neighborhood. (2004福建)

A.in all

B.above all

C.after all

D.at all [考查目标] 主要考查all构成的四个短语。

7 [答案与解析] B

in all意为“总共”；above all意为“最重要的是”； after all 意为“毕竟”；at all 意为“到底”。本句话意思是：我想买一个房子，现代的、舒服的，但最重要的是在一个安静的地区。 2.at all

(1)用在肯定句中，“竟然” I'm surprised that you came at all.

(2)用在否定句中，“一点也不” There was nothing to worry about at all.

(3)用在疑问句中，“到底”“究竟” Have you been there at all?

(4)用在条件句中，“真的，确实” If you do it at all, do it well.3.含“be + 形容词 + 介词”的短语 1) be good at 擅长于

2) be interested in 对„„感兴趣

3) be pleased / satisfied / content with 对„„满意 4) be famous for 因„„而出名 5) be kind / good to 对„„好 6) be lost in 沉湎于

7) be active in 在某方面积极 8) be sure about / of 确信 9) be afraid of 害怕 10) be full of 充满 11) be filled with 充满

12) be made of / from 由„„组成 13) be generous to 对„„慷慨 14) be popular with 受欢迎 15) be confident of 确信 16) be fond of 喜欢，喜爱

17) be angry with / at 对„„发脾气 18) be late for 迟到

19) be amazed / surprised / astonished / shocked at 对„„感到惊讶 20) be busy doing 忙着做„„

21) be excited about 对„„感到兴奋 22) be worried about 担心 23) be used for / as 用于

24) be curious about 对„„好奇

[例句] Lin Lin is confident of his ability to get work for himself.林林确信自己有能力做这活。He was generous to everybody with money, as a result, he saved little.他对谁花钱都很慷慨，结果没有攒到多少钱。She is very active in helping the poor.在帮助穷人方面，她很热心。Pop music is popular with the young generation.流行歌曲受年轻一代的欢迎。Lost in thought, he didn't realize that I came in.他陷入思考之中，没有意识到我进来了。I was amazed at the sight so that I didn't know what to do.看到这一幕我非常惊讶，不知道该做什么。Students in Senior 3 are busy preparing for the coming final exam.高三学生在忙于准备即将到来的期末考试。 【考例l】(2005重庆) -- You know, Bob is a little slow ____ understanding, so... -- So I have to be patient ____ him.

A.in; with

B.on; with

C.in; to

D.at; for [考查目标] 同定搭配中介词的选择。

[答案与解析] A

be slow in 意为“在„„方面反应迟钝”，be patient with 意为“对„„有耐心”。

8 4.end up with...以„„结束

(1) end up with + n.以„„结束

The party ended up with the singing of Auld Lang Syne.

(2) end up as...最后成为„He will end up as a president some day.

(3) end up + 地点状语最后(有„„结局) If you drive your car like that, you'll end (up) in hospital.5.“make + 名词” 短语 ① make a noise 吵闹

② make faces 做鬼脸，做苦脸 ③ make room for 给„„腾出地方 ④ make the bed 整理床铺 ⑤ make phone calls 打电话 ⑥ make friends with 交朋友 ⑦ make money 赚钱 ⑧ make use of 利用

⑨ make a decision 做出决定 ⑩ make a mistake 犯错误

[例句] The boy made a face at his teacher when she turned her back.老师转身时，男孩朝老师做了个鬼脸。 Working in the kitchen made the boy into a good cook.在厨房里干活使男孩成为一位优秀厨师。

They were moved out to a nearby hotel, to make room for more important persons.为了给更重要的人物腾出 地方，他们被搬到了附近的一家旅店。

【考例】 The idea puzzled me so much that I stopped for a few seconds to try to ____.(2003北京春招)

A.make it out

B.make it off

C.make it up

D.make it over [考查目标] 主要考查make短语。

[答案与解析] A make out意为“领悟、弄明白、发现真相” make off 意为“连忙跑掉”；make up 意为“弥补、打扮、组成”；make over 意为“转让、改造”。因为受到迷惑，所以应该是试图发现真相。 【考例】

-- When shall we start? -- Let's ____ it at 8:30.Is that all right? (2002北京)

A.set

B.meet

C.make

D.take [考查目标] 此题主要考查 make 短语。

[答案与解析] C make it“规定时间”为固定短语。本句话意思是“把出发的时间定在8点半”。set意思是“对时间”、“调时间”。 6.make fire点火

有以下fire (n.) 短语: be on fire 着火了(表示状态) / catch fire 燃着；着火(表示动作) / play with fire 玩火；干冒险的事 / Set sth.on fire = set fire to sth.放火烧„„ / make (a) fire 点火；生火 / start (cause) a fire引起火灾

[注意] fire作“火灾”“一堆火”解时，为可数名词。 7.a great / good many许多

(1) a great / good many + 名词复数，中间无“of”。A great many people have seen the film.(2) a great / good many + of + the / these / those / one's + 名词复数 A great many of the people have seen the film.8.make yourself at home 别拘束

(1) make yourself at home 别拘束(主人对客人说的委婉语) -- Good evening, Jim.-- Good evening, Mary.Come in and make yourself at home.

(2) (all) by oneself 独自(没有别人帮助) You can't poibly do it all by yourself.

(3) enjoy oneself = have a good time 玩得高兴 Please enjoy yourself while you're spending your holiday in Hawaii.

(4) for oneself 亲自; 为自己The student wants to think it for himself./ One should not live for oneself alone.

(5) of oneself 自动地The door closed of itself suddenly.

(6) be oneself 身体或情绪好 I am not myself today.

(7) help oneself to + n./ pron.随便„„ Please help yourself to the fish．

(8) in oneself 本身 This is not a bad idea in itself.

(9) come to oneself 苏醒The injured man came to him- self in five minutes.

(10) between ourselves 私下说的话 All this is between ourselves.9.the majority of...大多数的„„

(1) a / the majority of + 名词复数，作主语时，谓语动词多用复数。the majority 单独作主语，谓语动词用单数或复数形式均可。The majority of people seem to prefer watching games to playing games./ The majority were (was) in favour of the proposal.

(2) by a majority of + 数字，以超过„„票的多数She won the election by a majority of 900 votes.10.treat „ as „ 把„看做„ The kind lady treated me as her own daughter.

【比较】 表示“认为”的短语还有：

regard…as…

consider…(as)…

think of…as… look on / upon…as…

take…for…

[注意] 在consider„as„短语中as可省略，其他短语中不可。 [牛刀小试2] 1.If you are ____ about Australian cities, just read the book written by Dr.Johnson.A.interested

B.anxious

C.upset

D.curious 2.Her son, ____ whom she was so ____, went abroad 10 years ago.A.of; loved

B.for; cared C.to; devoted

D.on; affected 3.In order to continue to learn by ourselves when we have left school, we must ____ learn how to study in the school now.A.in all

B.after all

C.above all

D.at all 4.-- I am sorry I didn't do a good job.-- Never mind.____, you have tried your best.

A.Above all

B.In all

C.At all

D.After all 5.Since we can't find a bigger apartment, we'll have to ____ what we have.A.hope for the best

B.make room for C.make the best of

D.lay our hope on (DCCDC) 【句型归纳】

1.I don't enjoy singing, nor do I like computers.我不喜欢唱歌，也不喜欢电脑。/ Rock music is OK, and so is skiing.摇滚音乐还可以，滑雪也行。

这两句中nor与so用于倒装结构。例如：I don't know, nor do I care.我不知道，也不关心。so的常见句型有： (1) so + be / 助动词 / 情态动词 + 主语 (意为“主语也 „„” ) (2) neither / nor + be / 助动词 / 情态动词 + 主语(意为“主语也不„„” ) (3) so it is / was with sb / sth和so it is / was the same with sb / sth (意为“主语也„„” ) (用在前文有两个或以上的从句，而且分句有不同的谓语或既有肯定又有否定以及既有系动词义有行为动词的情况) (4) so + 主语 + be / 助动词 / 情态动词 (意为“主讲确实如此”)，表示进一步肯定。 (5) 主语 + did + so (意为“主语按照吩咐做了”)。

10 【考例】 Mary never does any reading in the evening, ____.(2005全国 III) A.so does John

B.John does too C.John doesn't too

D.nor does John [考查目标] nor表示“也不”引导的倒装结构。

[答案与解析] D 由never可以判断该句为否定句。空格处句意为“约翰也没读书”。nor, so, neither可引起倒装句。 2.Chuck is a busineman who is always so busy that he has little time for his friends.查克是个生意人，他总是那么忙，几乎没有时间和朋友在一起。

该句中so...that...和such...that...都能连接结果状讲从句，但要注意词序不同。例如：Joan is such a lonely girl that all of us like her.= She is so lovely a girl that we all like her.常见句型：

(1) such + a / an + 形容词 + 单数可数名词 + that clause (2) such + 形容词 + 复数可数名词 + that clause (3) such + 形容词 + 不可数名词 + that clause (4) so + 形容词 + a / an + 单数可数名词 + that clause (5) so + 形容词 / 副词 + that clause (6) so + many / few + 复数可数名词 + that clause (7) so + much / little + 不可数名词 + that clause 注意：① 当little不表示数量“少”而表示“小”的意思时，仍然

要用such。② 当so + adj./ adv.或 such + n.位于句首时，主句需要倒装。

【考例】 So difficult ____ it to live in an English-speaking country that I determined to learn English.(2001上海) A.I have felt

B.have I felt

C.I did feel

D.did I feel [考查目标] so + adj.位于句首时，主句倒装。

[答案与解析] D A、C语序不对，排除。B时态不对。

3.One day Chuck is on a flight acro the Pacific Ocean when suddenly his plane crashes.一天，查克在飞越太平洋时．他的飞机突然坠毁了。

该句中的“when”表示“正在这时”，相当于and just或and at that time.这时不能用while / as 替换。 常见句型：(1) be about to do sth when...(2) be doing sth when...(3) be on the point of doing sth when...【考例】We were swimming in the lake ____ suddenly the storm started.(2004北京春招) A.when

B.while

C.until

D.before [考查目标] "when" 作连词，表示“正在这时”。

[答案与解析] A 意为“我正在湖中游泳，突然暴风雨来了。”只有when才能用于这种句型。

4.He has to learn how to collect water, hunt for food, and make fire.他不得不学会收集淡水．寻找食物，生火什么的。 该句中的“how I to collect...”为动词不定式短语作宾语。例如：We must decide which one to buy.疑问词which, what, how, when, where等与小定式构成不定式短语。

【考例】 I've worked with children before, so I knew what ____ in my new job. (NMET 2000) A.expected B.to expect C.to be expecting D.expects [考查目标] what to do sth 不定式短语作宾语。

[答案与解析] B 该句需要填非谓语动词。排除A、D。句意为“以前我与孩子在一块儿工作过。因此我知道我的新工作需要什么。”C不表示进行，排除C。

5.In order to survive, Chuck developed a friendship with an unusual friend — a volleyball he called Wilson.为了生存下去，查克和一位不寻常的朋友--“排球”建立了友谊，查克叫他威尔森。 1.该句中的"in order to"，意思为“为了，以便”，作目的

状语。在句子中作同的状语的常见句型有五种结构：to do sth / in order to do sth / so as to do sth / in order that clause / so that clause

11 注意：(1) so as to do sth 不能位于句首。(2) 如果主句与从句的主语一致时，四个结构可以相互转换。(3) 在in order that / so that 引导的从句中，谓语动词常与can, could, may, might 等情态动词连用。

【考例】(2005北京) I'd like to arrive 20 minutes early ____ I can have time for a cup of tea.

A.as soon as B.as a result

C.in case D.so that [考查目标] 目的状语。

[答案与解析]D as soon as “一„就„”；as a result“结果是”；in case “万一”；so that“以便，为的是”。句意：“我想提前二十分钟到以便有时间喝杯茶”。

2.该句子中 volleyball 是作同位语。例如：He advised farmers to choose the best seed-heads, the ones that had the best color.注意：这种同位语(不是同位语从句)与非限制性定语从句的区别。

【考例】(NMET 2002) Meeting my uncle after these years was an unforgotten moment, ____ I will always treasure.

A.that

B.one

C.it

D.what [考查目标] one作同位语，指代a moment。

[答案与解析] B that不能引导非限制性定语从句，排除A；if不能作同位语，排除C；what既不能引导非限制定语从句，也不能作同位语。可以填which，这样就成了非限制性定语从句。

6.For a long time the language in America stayed the same, while the language in England changed.长期以来，美国英语保持不变，但英国英语变化了。

1.该句中的“while"用作并列连词．表示前后对比，意为

“然而”。“while"充当连词，还能引导时间状语从句。意为“during the time that„”；引导让步状语从句，意 为“although„”。

2.该句中的 "stay" 为系动词。后接表语 (the same)。 除了stay外，常见的系动词还有: become, get, turn, grow, go, come, run, fall, keep, stay, remain。

【考例】(NMET 2003) Why don't you put the meat in the fridge? It will ____ fresh for several days.

A.be stayed

B.stay C.be staying

D.have stayed [考查目标] 系动词的用法。

[答案与解析] B 系动词没有被动语态，一般不用进行

时态，排除A、C；句意不是表示完成，排除D。系动词表示状态。 7.for the first time 第一次

(1) for the first time 第一次，后面不加从句，在句中作状语 They came to Beijing for the first time.(2) the first time 名词短语，在从句中充当连词，后接时间状语从句，不接that，when等连词。有同样用法的短语还有：every time; next time; the last time They liked Beijing the first time they went there.(3) It's / This is the first time that + 从句(用现在完成时)这是„„的第一次 It's the first time that I have ever been abroad at all.8.What is it that...? 是什么„„? 强调句的用法：

(1) 结构：It is / It was (过去时间) + 被强调部分 + that / who (专指人) + 其他部分

(2) 用法：除了谓语动词不能强调，句子的每部分均可强调。

Jim met the student in the street last week.

主语

宾语

地点状语 时间状语

强调主语：It was Jim who / that met the student in the street last week.

强调宾语：It was the student whom / that Jim met in the street last week.

强调地点状语：It was in the street that Jim met the student last week.

强调时间状语：It was last week that Jim met the student in the street.(3) 注意点：

一般疑问句的强调句：

Was it Dr Wang who spoke to you just now?

特殊疑问句的强凋句：

Who is it that will visit our cla?

Where is it that he has gone?

When was it that she went?

not „ until „ 用于强调句：

It was not until then that I realized I was wrong.[牛刀小试3] 1.-- I would never ever come to this restaurant again.The food is terrible!

-- ____.(2004广西) A.Nor am I

B.Neither would I C.Same with me

D.So do I 2.We can't imagine ____ little mice can eat up ____ many crops every year.A.so; so

B.such; so C.such; such D.so; so 3.Jasmine was holidaying with her family in a wildlife park ____ she was bitten on the leg by a lion.A.when

B.while

C.since

D.once 4.It is said in Australia there is more land than the govern- ment knows ____.(NMET 2002) A.it what to do with

B.what to do it with C.what to do with it

D.to do what with it 5.Roses need special care ___they can live through winter. (2004 天津) A.because B.so that C.even if

D.as (BBACB) 【交际速成】

1.Talking about likes and dislikes.谈论喜欢和不喜欢 -- I enjoy Chinese food very much.-- ____.(03东北三校) A.Please taste quickly

B.Have more, please C.Help yourself

D.Eat slowly while it is hot [答案与解析]C本题主要考查具体语境下“对事物喜好”的表达及应答。A项不礼貌，B、D两项属汉语习惯，C项符合此时英语语境。

【归纳】英语中常见表达喜欢和不喜欢态度的用语有： (1) This book is very interesting.(2) I like / love the movie (very much). (3)I like / love to play computer games.(4) I like taking photos.(5) I enjoy listening to music.(6) I'm interested in science.My hobbies / interests are...(7) He is fond of music.(8) This song is bad / awful.(9) I don't like the movie very much / at all.(10)I don't enjoy collecting stamps.(11)I hate to do homework.I hate dancing, (12)I'm not into claic music.(13)I think that claic music is terrible / boring.2.Making apologies 道歉

13 -- I'm sorry I'm calling you so late.-- ____ Okay.

(2003北京春招) A.This is

B.You're

C.That's

D.I'm [答案与解析] C 本题主要考查英语中道歉及应答用语。A、B、D三项不符合交际英语的习惯，故C项正确。 【归纳】英语中常见道歉用语有：

(1) I'm very sorry.I didn't mean to (hurt your feelings).(2) I'm terribly sorry about that.(3) I'm afraid I've brought you too much trouble.(4) Please excuse me coming late.(5) Please forgive me.(6) Excuse me, please.(7) I beg your pardon.应答表达有：

(1) That's / It's all right.(2) That's / It's OK.(3) Never mind.(4) It doesn't matter.(5) It's nothing.(6) Forget it.(7) Don't worry about that.(8) Don't mention it.3.Talking about language difficulties in communication 谈论语言交际困难 -- I'm sorry.I can't catch you.____ -- OK, it's B—L—A—C—K.

A.Would you please walk slowly?

B.I don't understand you．

C.What's the meaning of this word?

D.Would you please repeat it more slowly? [答案与解析] D本题主要考查语言交际困难的功能意念。catch 在整个语境中是“听见，听清”的意思，A项错误理解了catch 在此处的意思，B、C两项语义不连贯， 故正确答案是D。 【归纳】英语中常见的谈论语言交际困难的用语有： (1) Pardon? / I beg your pardon.(2) Sorry, I can't follow you.(3) Can you speak more slowly, please? (4 )How do you say...in English.'? (5) I don't know how to say that in English.(6) I don't know the word in English.(7) How do you spell it, please? (8) I'm sorry I only know a little English.(9) Could you repeat that, please? Could you say that

again, please? (10) What do you mean by killing time? [牛刀小试4] 1.-- ____ I didn't hear you clearly.It's too noisy here.

14 -- I was saying that the party was great.A.Repeat.

B.Once again.C.Sorry?

D.So what? 2.-- Do you like a house with no garden? -- ____.But anyhow, it's better to have one than none.A.Not a bit

B.Not a little C.Not really

D.Not specially 3.-- I'm sorry for stepping on your foot? -- ____.A.It's OK

B.You are welcome C.It's your fault

D.Never you mind 4.-- What you said at the meeting hurt me badly! -- Sorry.But ____.A.I didn't mean it

B.I didn't mean to C.I don't mean it

D.I don't mean to 5.-- You seem to show interest in cooking.-- ____? On the contrary, I'm tired of it.A.Really

B.Pardon

C.OK

D.What (CCABD) 【精典题例】

1.-- David has made great progre recently.

-- ____, and ____.

A.So he has; so have you

B.So has he; so have you

C.So he has; so you have

D.So has he; so you have 【解析】选A 答句中的he指David，不倒装。“So have you” 意为“你也一样(取得了进步)”。 2.Little ____ what others think.A.does he care about

B.care he about C.about he eared

D.about cared he 【解析】选A little为否定副词，置于句首时，句子使用部分倒装。 3.At school, what he enjoys ____ football.A.playing B.to play C.is playing D.played 【解析】选C what he enjoys为主语从句，谓语动词为be，表语为playing football。不要误以为playing是enjoy的宾语而误选A。

4.At the ____news, all the women present burst out crying.A.unexpecting

B.disappointing C.disappointed

D.interesting 【解析】选B联系语境，所有在场的妇女都哭了，因此为disappointing"令人失望的(消息)”。 5.He was about to tell me the secret ____ someone patted him on the shoulder.A.as

B.until

C.while

D.when 【解析】选D "when"表示“就在这时，突然”。

6.The wolf said in a ____ voice and the scholar felt ____.A.frightening; frightened

B.frightened; frightened C.frightened; frightening

D.frightening; frightening 【解析】选A frightening“令人害怕”；frightened“感 到害怕”。

15 7.In our ____ life, English is ____ used.A.everyday; wide

B.everyday; widely C.every day; wide

D.every day; widely 【解析】选B everyday“日常的，每天的”；widely“广泛地”。 8.-- Hello, Mary.I've got a girlfriend. -- What's she like? -- ____.A.I don't know

B.She's like her mother, not father C.She likes music D.Not had! Quite pretty 【解析】选D表外表给人的印象。

9.The fire ____ for half an hour before the fire fighters arrived.A.had put out

B.was put out C.had been out

D.had broken out 【解析】选C be out"火熄灭”，表示状态。

10.It has been suggested that the land ____ equally among the peasants.A.be shared

B.should be spared C.saved

D.be spent 【解析】选A suggest后用虚拟语气。be shared前可 省略should。

11.She took ____ in physics and read ____ on the subject.A.interest; as books many as she could B.an interest; as many books as she could C.interested; as many books as she can D.interests; as books as she could 【解析】选B根据短语搭配和时态一致可知。 12.-- How's the young man? -- ____.A.He's twenty

B.He's a doctor C.He is much better

D.He's David 【解析】选C how is sb.“某人身体如何”。

13.Let Harry play with your toys as well.Clare, you must learn to ____.A.support

B.care

C.spare

D.share 【解析】选D share“分享”；support“支持”；care“在意”；spare“抽出(时间)。节余”。 14.The new dre looks wonderful on you ____ the collar.A.besides B.except C.beside D.except for 【解析】选D“美中不足的是领子”，表示部分修正。 15.-- What about your clamate, Susan? -- Our teacher ____ her a good and clever student.A.regards

B.believes C.suggests

D.considers 【解析】选D consider as„“认为„„是„„”，as可省略。

高一英语各单元知识点总结及重难点解析Unit3-4 ☆重点句型☆

1.Instead of spending your vacation on a bus, ...you may want to try hiking.Instead和instead 0f的用法 2.Say "Hi" / "Hello" / "Thanks" to sb.(for me) 问候的句型 3.Is anybody seeing you off? 进行时表将来

16 4.She struggled and struggled, and could not get on her feet.(= keep struggling) 5.You should not go rafting unle you know...unle引导条件状语从句，相当于if...not 6.By staying at..., tourists can help the villagers make money so that they can take care of the fiver and the birds.目的状语从句

7.She was so surprised that she couldn't move.结果状语从句 8.Tree after tree went down, cut down by water.过去分词作状语

9.The next moment, the first wave swept her down, swallowing the garden.现在分词作状语

10.However, before she could think twice, the water was upon her.It didn't take long before the building was destroyed.

before的用法 ☆重点词汇☆

1.means n.方法；途径 2.experience n.经验 3.equipment n.设备 4.succeful adj.成功的 5.protect v.保护 6.handle v.处理 7.consider v.考虑 8.benefit n.利益

9.particular adj.特别的 10.effect n.效果 11.combine v.合并

12.unforgettable adj.不会忘记的 13.advance v.前进 14.seize v.抓住 15.struggle v.奋斗 16.fear v.& n.害怕 17.strike v.敲打 18.destroy v.毁掉 19.publish v.出版

20.naughty adj.调皮的 ☆重点短语☆

1.get away from 逃离

2.watch / look out 注意，当心

3.go for a hike / go hiking 去徒步旅游 4.as with 正如„„一样 5.see off 为某人送行

6.on the other hand 在另一方面 7.take care of 照顾

8.get close / near to 接近，凑近9.tree after tree 一棵又一棵的树 10.as wall as 也，和„„一样(好) 11.protect„from 保护„„不受„„的伤害 12.be surprised at 因„„而吃惊

17 13.be caught / trapped / struck in 被„„困住 14.take place 发生

15.go through 通过，经过；经历(痛苦的事) 16.be upon 临近，逼近17.hold on to 紧紧抓住

18.refer to 提到，说到；查询(信息) 19.look into 注视„„的内部；检查，调查 20.for fear of (doing) sth.惟恐„„ ☆短语闯关☆

下列短语都是这两个单元学过的重要短语，请你根据汉语在横线上填入一个正确的词，每个词4分，80分才能过关，你一定能过关．做好了闯关的准备吗?那么我们就开始吧? l.get ____ from 逃离

away 2.watch ____ 注意，当心 out 3.protect sb / sth ____ 保护／保卫某人(某事物) from 4.see sb ____ 到火车站、飞机场等某处为某人送行 off 5.on the other ____ 另一方面 hand 6.as ____ as也，还，而且 well 7.____ place发生，产生 take 8.____ fire失火 on 9.pull sb ____ 把„„往上拽 up 10.get ____ one's feet站立起来；站起身来 on 11.go ____ 通过，经受。仔细检查 through 12.____ holiday在度假 on 13.travel ____ 旅行社代理人 agent 14.be ____ 逼近，临近upon 15.____ exercise 进行体育锻炼 take 16.____ "Hi" to sb for / from sb 代某人向某人问候 say 17.come ____ with提出 up 18.go ____ a hike 去远足 for 19.be caught ____ 受困于„„，陷于„„ in 20.____ a second 马上，一会儿 in 21.look ____ 往„„里面看，调查 into 22.refer ____ 提到．涉及；参考 to 23.hold ____ 抓住，握住 onto 24.sweep ____ 冲走，刮走 away 25.sweep ____ 冲倒，吹倒 down ☆交际用语☆

1.Where would you prefer going...? 2.How would you like to go to...? 3.Have a nice / pleasant trip ! 4.Well, I must be off.5.It's all right． 6.I'm afraid.7.Come on !

18 8.It scares me.9.Don't worry.10.First..., next..., then..., finally...☆单词聚焦☆ 1.advance的用法

▲构词：advanced adj.高等的．先进的，高深的 ▲搭配：

① in advance 在前头，预先，事先

② in advance of 在„„前面；比„„进步；超过 ③ on the advance (物价)在上涨

【考例】It is said that Mi White had some difficulty in studying the ____ maths.

A.improved B.developed C.advanced D.increased [考查目标] 本题考查形容词advanced与近义词的区别。

[答案与解析]C “高等数学”的英译是advanced maths，advanced意思是“先进的。高级的”。 2.before 的特殊用法

(1) He had run out of the room before I could stop him.我还没来得及拦住他，他就跑出了屋子。

(2) Three weeks went by before We knew it.三周过去了，我们才意识到。(或：时间不知不觉已过三周了。)

(3) It wasn't / didn't take long before he returned.他没过多久就回来了。

It won't be long before we graduate.不要过多久我们就要毕业了。 3.chance的用法 ▲搭配：

① by any chance 万一，碰巧，或许 ② by chance 偶然，意外地

③ take a / one's chance 冒一冒险，碰碰运气，利用一下机会

【考例6】 (2005南京模拟)Most of the ___are in seasonal work, mainly connected with tourism and agriculture.

A.work

B.luck

C.chances

D.services [考查目标] chance的词义。

[答案与解析] C

chance在本句的词义是“机会”。 4.consider v.

(1) 考虑

A) consider + n./ doing

I consider going abroad.

B) consider + 疑问词 + to do

You have to consider what to do next.

(2) 认为

A) consider + n.(+as / to be) + n./ adj.

I consider Mary as / to be my best friend.

They considered Paris the brain and heart of the country.

B) consider + n.+ to have done

I consider him to have acted disgracefully.

除了consider„as„表认为外，还有regard„as

„，look on„as„，take„as„，think of„as„ 5.cost的用法

▲ 构词：costly adj.昂贵的，贵重的

19 ▲ 搭配：

① cost sb.sth.花费某人(多少钱)；让某人付出(代价)／牺牲„„ ② at all costs 不惜任何代价．无论如何 ③ at any cost 不惜任何代价，无论如何 ④ at cost (price) 按成本价格，按原价

⑤ at the cost of 以„„为代价，用„„换来的；丧失；牺牲

【考例】They wondered how much this kind of car would ____ them.

A.pay

B.spend

C.cost

D.waste [考查目标] 本题考查cost和它的几个近义词的区别。 [答案与解析] C cost的意思是“耗费”，主语是指物的 名词．而pay和spend等的主语是指人的名词。 6.effect n.效果；作用 have an effect on sth.

His words had a great pushing effect on his students.

(1) be of no effect 无效

(2) come into effect 开始生效；开始实行

[比较] affect vt.影响 The climate affected the amount of the rainfall.7.experience的用法

▲构词: experienced adj.有经验的，熟练的 ▲搭配: ① by experience 凭经验；从经验中 ② from experience 凭经验；从经验中 ③ gain experience in„ 获得„„经验 ④ be experienced in„ 某方面有经验

▲友情提示: experience这个词作为可数名词用时，解释为“经历”，作为不可数名词用时解释为“经验”。 【考例】 (2005山西模拟) ____teaches that he was right.Good friendship is just not easily formed.

A.Knowledge B.Teachers C.Experience D.Parents [考查目标] experience的意思。

[答案与解析] C

experience常为不可数名词，意思是“经验”。 8.fear n.& vt.

(1) n.恐惧 (多作不可数名词)

His face was growing pale with fear.

忧虑；担心的事(可数)

There is no reason for your fears.

for fear of 由于怕„„，以防

He left an hour earlier for fear of miing his train.

for fear (that) 惟恐；怕的是；以防

She worried for fear that the child would be hurt.

in fear of 害怕；担心

The thief was in fear of the police.

(2) v.恐惧；害怕，接 n./ pron.

Cats fear big dogs.

恐惧；害怕，接to do

Don't fear to tell the truth.

恐怕；担心，接从句

She feared that she might not find him in his room.▲构词：fearful adj.可怕的，严重的；惧怕的，胆怯的；担心的，忧虑的 fearle adj.不怕的，大胆的，勇敢的，无畏的 ▲搭配：

① be in fear (of) (为„„而)提心吊胆 ② for fear of 因为怕；以免，怕的是

③ for fear that-clause 生怕；为了防止(某事发生) ④ have a fear that-clause 担心／怕(发生某事) ⑤ with fear 吓得，怕得

⑥ fear (vi.) for...担心／忧虑„„

【考例】(2004江苏)He got to the station early, ____ miing his train.

A.in case of

B.instead of

C.for fear of

D.in search [考查目标] fear构成的短语的用法和意思。

[答案与解析]C

for fear of 常在句中作状语，意思是 “怕的是„„。担心„„”。 9.fun n.高兴；乐趣；有趣的人或事

(1) for fun 为了高兴；为着好玩

I only did it for fun.

(2) make fun of 开„„的玩笑；取笑

It is wrong to make fun of a cripple.

[比较]

(1) laugh at 笑(某人)；嘲笑

It's unkind to laugh at a person who is in trouble.

(2) play a joke on 开(某人的)玩笑 10.means n.手段；办法

(1) by means of 用„„；依靠„„

The water may be carried by means of a pipe.

(2) by all means 一定；务必；(表示同意)当然可以，没问题：务必，无论如何，千方百计地

Try by all / every means to persuade him to come.

(3) by no means 完全不是；一点也不；决不

This is by no means the first time you have been late.

还有： by this means 用这种方法； by any means 用一切可能的方法或手段 【考例】(MET 1991)Students sometimes support them- selves by ____ of evening job.

A.ways

B.offers

C.means

D．helps [考查目标] by means of 短语的意思。

[答案与解析] C by means of 的意思是“通过某种手段”。 11.normal adj.正常的；正规的

the normal temperature, normal behavior

(1) regular 规则的；有规律的

keep regular hours 生活有规律；按时作息

(2) common普通的；常见的

Tom is a common name in Britain.共有的；共同的

have a common interest 有着共同爱好

21

(3) usual 惯常的；惯例的

It's usual with him to go to the office on foot.

(4) ordinary平凡的；普通的

in ordinary dre 12.once的用法 ▲ 搭配：

① all at once 突然；同时

② at once 立刻，马上；同时

③ (every) once in a while 偶尔，有时，间或

④ for this once (= for once，just for once) 就这一次；

破例一回 ⑤ more than once 不止一次，多次 ⑥ not once 一次也不

⑦ once again / more再一次 ⑧once and again一再，再三

⑨ once or twice 一两次；有时，偶尔 ⑩ once too often又(多了)一次 ? once upon a time从前

【考例】(2004上海) ____ we have learned something, additional learning increases the length of time we will remember it.

A.Before

B.Once

C.Until

D.Unle [考查目标] 连词once的用法和词义。

[答案与解析] B once在作连词使用时意思是“一旦”。 13.prefer v.宁愿；更喜欢

(1) prefer + n./ pron.

The boy preferred a detective story.

(2) prefer + v.-ing

Do you prefer living abroad?

(3) prefer + to do

She prefers to live among the working people.

(4) prefer sb.to do sth.

She preferred him to stay at home.

(5) prefer + n./ pron./ doing + to + n./ pron./ doing 喜欢„„而不喜欢

I prefer the town to the country./ While he was in the office he preferred doing something to doing nothing.

(6) prefer to do...rather than do = would rather do ...than do...宁愿„„而不愿 I prefer to walk there rather than go by bus.

(7) prefer + 从句(谓语动词用should do，should可省略) She preferred that he should do it in the kitchen.14.protect的用法

▲ 构词：protection n.保护(者/物)，防御

▲ 搭配：protect sb from / against 防止„„遭受„„；使„„免于，保护„„使不受 【考例】 (MET 1992) Clarke was greatly admired at the club for the succeful ____.

A.self-satisfaction

B.self-protection

C.self-respect

D.self-service [考查目标] protect及其派生词的词义。

[答案与解析]B self-protection是名词，意思是“自我保护”。 15.separate的用法

▲ 构词：separation n.[U]分开，分离

22 ▲ 搭配：

① separate A from B 把A和B分开

② A is separated from B by„ A和B为„„所分开／阻隔 ③ separate sth (up) into„ 把„„分成(几分) ▲辨析：separate; divide; part 都含“分开”的意思。 separate 指“把原来在一起的人或物分开”。例如: Separate those two boys who are fighting, will you? (你)把那两个打架的孩子拉开，好吗? divide 指“施加外力或自然地把某人或某物由整体分成若干部分”。 part指“把密切相关的人或物分开”，还有“分手”之意。

【考例】(NMET 2001)As we joined the big crowd I got ____ from my friends.

A.separated

B.spared

C.lost

D.mied [考查目标] 动词separate的词义。

[答案与解析] A separated和get搭配有被动意义，表 示“被隔开；被分隔”。 [牛刀小试1] 用所给单词的适当形式填空：

(advance, means, cost, protect, fear, separate) 1.The teacher improved the students' English by ____ of dictation and recitation.(means) 2.All the goods ___me almost half a million dollars.(cost) 3.We must ____ the wild animals from the hunting.(protect) 4.Every baby should be ____ after he is horn.(separated) 5.None of them ____ death when the enemy came into the village.(feared) 6.There are too many people, so you should have bought a ticket in ____.(advance) ☆词语比较☆

1.wear, put on, have on, dre, be in, try on

(1) wear v.穿着；戴；蓄须(发)；磨损；(脸容)呈现，显出 He is wearing an overcoat today.

* wear out (把) 穿破；(把) 用坏；(使) 疲乏；(使) 耗尽I have worn out my shoes./ My patience wore (was worn) out.

(2) put on 穿上；戴上(侧重穿着的动作)

Put on your sweater, otherwise you will feel cold.

(3) dre vt.给„„穿衣服

n.衣服；连衣裙

dre sb.(in sth.) 或 be dreed (in sth.) 注意：穿的衣服接在in之后。Mother dreed her baby and then they went downstairs.

(4) have on 表示穿着的状态，注意不能用进行时。

At the Spring Festival, all children have on new clothes.

(5) be in表示穿着的状态 There was a girl in red.

(6) try on 试穿

Mother was trying on a new dre.2.strike, hit, beat

(1) hit vt.

① 打；敲；击；击中；射中 He hit a ball over the fence./ The stone hit him on the head.

② 使„„受到打击 The bad news hit every one hard.

(2) beat vt.& vi.

① 连续有节奏地打；敲

The rain heat against the window.

② (心)跳动 His heart had stopped beating.

23

③ (鸟翼) 扑动

The bird beat its wings rapidly as it flew on.

④ 打败；打赢；取胜

Our champion can beat all runners in the country.

(3) strike vt.& vi.

① 打；敲；击；砍；打中；击中

He struck me with his fist.

The house was struck by lightning.

② 发起进攻；袭击

He moved away as the animal struck.

③ 撞；触(礁)

His head struck the table as he fell.

④ 擦(火柴)

I struck a match and held it to his cigarette.

⑤ (某种想法) 忽然出现；忽然想起，相当于occur to。

A happy thought struck her.

⑥ 给人深刻印象(常用于被动语态)

I was struck by her beauty.

⑦ 罢工

They are striking for higher pay.

⑧ (钟)敲(响) We waited for the clock to strike six.3.complete, finish complete 可作形容词，表示“彻底的；全面的”。 complete与finish表示“完成”时的区别。

(1) complete 作及物动词，只接 n.或 pron.，常用于完成预定的任务，工程建设等The railway is not completed yet.(2) finish vi./ vt.指完成，结束一件事情；可接 n.或doing。如：finish one's homework / middle school / writing the book ☆短语归纳☆ 1.cut down

(1) 砍倒 If you cut down all the trees you will rain the land.

(2) 减少；削减 I have decided to cut down my smoking.2.含get的短语

① get back 回来，恢复，送回

② get off下来，动身，起飞

③ get up 起床，站起来 ④ get on 上(车) ⑤ get on / along with 与某人相处．某事的进展

⑥ get together 聚首，碰头

⑦ get away from 逃离 ⑧ get on one's feet 站起来

⑨ get down 下来 ⑩ get on well with 与„„相处融洽

? get married 结婚

? get to 到达 ? get through 通过，接通

? get down to 开始着手做某事

? get acro (使)通过

? get(a)round 传开，说服 ? get in 进入。收获

? get out 出去，逃脱

[例句]How are you getting along with your busine? 生意进展如何? / If you take Mary out for a drive you must promise to get her back for her music leon.如果你带玛丽去兜风的话，你必须答应带她回来上音乐课。/ I can't get my boots off,

24 for they are too tight.我脱不掉靴子，它太紧了。/ We all try to get together at least once a year at Christmas time.在圣诞期间我们尽量一年至少聚会一次。/ When one has busine on hand it is hard to get away from home.如果一个人手头有事，离开家很难。

【考例】(2004辽宁) The final examination is coming up soon.It's time for us to ____ our studies．

A.get down to B.get out C.get back for D.get over [考查目标] 此题主要考查get短语。

[答案与解析]A get down to 意为“开始着手做某事”；get out 意为“离开，摆脱”；get back for 意为“回去拿”；get over意为“克服，渡过”。本句话意思是：期末考试就要到了，我们该开始学习了。

【考例】(NMET 1993)Readers can ____ quite well without knowing the exact meaning of each word.

A.get over B.get in C.get along D.get through [考查目标]此题主要考查get短语。

[答案与解析]C

get over 意为“痊愈，克服”；get in 意为“插话”；get along 意为“进展．继续”；gel through 意为“接通。办完”。本句话意思是：读者不必准确知道每个词的意思就能继续下去。 3.get away (from)

(1) 摆脱 Ways must be found to get away from poverty.

(2)走开；离开 She didn't get away until nine last night.

(3)逃走，使离开The bank robbers used a stolen car to get away.

(4)拿走 Get all thee party dishes away! 4.get close to

(1) close adj.靠近；接近

The church is close to the shops.

亲密；密切

Are you a close friend of theirs?

(2) close adv.靠近；接近

He was standing close to the door.

(3) close v.关上；关闭(不开发)；结束

She closed her eyes./ Her eyes closed.(闭上)

(4 ) closely adv.紧密地；仔细地；密切地

He got closely in touch with the magazines of today.

The little baby was closely looked after by her.[比较]

(1) close 与 closely 作副词时，close含具体之意，closely 含抽象之意。

(2) 类似的词组有 high (高) -- highly (高度地)，deep (深深地) -- deeply (深入地)，wide (很开，宽) -- widely (广

泛地)，low (低的)-- lowly (低贱的) (作形容词) 5.hand in 交上去(给老师或上级)；交来(hand v.)

Each student has to hand in a composition once a week. [比较]

(1) hand down 传下来；传给 Our father handed down these customs to us.

(2) hand on„to„传给，传递They will hand the photograph to those who have not seen it.

(3) hand out 发给大家；散发 The teacher handed out the books at the beginning of the leon． 6.instead of 代替„„

(1) instead of + n./ pron.

Give me the red one instead 0f the green one.

(2) instead of + doing

25

We walked down the stairs instead of taking the elevator.

(3) instead of + 介词短语

He studies in the evening instead of during the day.

[比较]

(1) instead adv.作为替代 („„而)，代替 If Harry is not well enough to go with you, take me instead.

(2) rather than 而不是，与其„„宁愿 He ran rather than walked.

(3) in place of 代替，„„而不用The Chinese use chopsticks in place of knives and forks.7.含take的短语

① take a picture 照相，拍照

② take a taxi / bus, etc.打的(坐公交车等) ③ take away 拿走，夺取，使离去 ④ take care of 小心，照料，保管 ⑤ take off 脱，去掉，取消，起飞 ⑥ take out 拿出，带„„出去

⑦ take one's place 就坐，坐某人的座位，代替某人的位置 ⑧ take place 发生，产生 ⑨ take exercise 做运动 ⑩ take a seat 坐下 ? take turns 轮流

? take an active part in 积极参加 ? take a meage 捎口信 ? take on 从事，呈现

? take the place of 取代，代替 ? take apart 拆开

? take down 拿下，记下 ? take...for...误认为„„ ? take in 吸收，接纳

? take up 拿起．从事．占据

[例句] Father was convinced that Peter was unhappy at boarding school, and made arrangements to take him away.父亲确信彼得在寄宿学校不开心，决定把他带走。/ Will you lake care of buying the wine for tonight's party? 你负责为今晚的晚会买酒水好吗? / The boys got into the car and took off for the drug store.男孩们进到车里，开车去了药店。/ He took my place in the queue so that I could go and get something to eat.他替我排好了队，以便我能够回 去弄点儿吃的。 8.used to

(1) used to do sth.过去常常„„(现在已不如此)

We used to grow beautiful roses.

注意：否定句和疑问句有两种

You usedn’t to make that mistake.She didn't use(d) to do it, did she?

You used to smoke a pipe, didn't you? / use(d) n't you?

(2) be / get / become used to + n./ doing习惯于

I have always been used to hard work.

He got used to living in the country.

(3) be used to do 被用来做„„

26

This knife is used to cut bread.

表示“过去常常„„”时，used to与would区别：

(1) would 只强调“过去常常„„”，used to 说明现在不是如此。

The old woman would sit there for hours doing nothing.

(2) would 只接行为动词，used to 可接行为动词和表状态的词。如：be, like, know, have。There used to be a temple at the foot of the mountain.9.watch out 当心；注意

You'll be cheated if you don't watch out.

(1) watch out for = look out for 提防；当心

You must always watch out for the traffic here!

(2) watch over 照看；看守；负责

The mother bird is watching over her young.10.含“动词 + out”短语

① come out 出来，出版，传出 ② go out 出去，熄灭，不时兴 ③ look out 当心，注意

④ take out 拿出，取出，带„„出去 ⑤ rush out 冲出去，匆忙大量生产 ⑥ try out 尝试，试验 ⑦ watch out 小心

⑧ wear out 穿破，用坏，(使)疲乏，消磨 ⑨ find out 找出，查出

⑩ make out 填写，完成．设法应付 ? get out 出去，逃离，泄露，公布 ? pick out 看出，选出 ? think out 想出

? give out 发出，筋疲力尽 ? set out出发，陈述

[例句]Please go out and tell the children to make le noise.请出去告诉孩子们不要吵闹。/ These bicycles have been rushed out and not up to our usual standard.这些自行车匆忙大量生产，没有达到我们的正常标准。/ Watch out.The train is coming.小心，火车来了。/ Your will wear out your patience in time, my friend.朋友，最终我们会没有耐心的。 【考例】(2005湖北) This picture was taken a long time ago.I wonder if you can ____ my father.

A.find out

B.pick out

C.look out

D.speak out [考查目标]此题主要考查out构成的短语意思区别。 [答案与解析]B pick out意为“挑选，辨别出”；find out意为“找出．发现”；look out意为“留神，注意”： speak out意为“大声说出”。 [牛刀小试2] 请根据句意，选用所给短语的适当形式填空：

(get away，take up，take on，think out，get down to) 1.-- Shall we set off right now? -- Sorry.I'm too busy to ____ for the moment.(get away) 2.The final examination is coming: you really must ____ your studies.(get down) 3.The manager doesn't have much free time as his work ____ nearly all his spare time.(takes up) 4.We also shared a number of qualities which we fell were in our favor when we ____ the task.(took on)

27 5.He might have ___his idea about the art exhibition much better, if he had planned what he wanted to say. (thought out) ☆句型归纳☆

1.You shouldn't go rafting unle you know how to swim, and you should always wear a life jacket.除非你会游泳，而且要一直穿着救生衣，否则就不应该去做漂流运动。

该句中的unle引导状语从句。例如：One can't learn a foreign language well unle he studies hard.unle引导的条件状语从句，一般可以与if...not...互换。还要注意unle引导的从句经常可以省略。 【考例】(200l北京春招)The men will have to wait all day ____ the doctor works faster.

A.if

B.unle

C.whether

D.that [考查目标]状语从句。

[答案与解析]B 句子意思是“如果医生不快点工作， 这些人将不得不等一整天。”应该选unle。

2.Eco-travel is a way to find out what can be done to help animals and plants as well as people.生态游可以找到既帮助别人．又帮助动植物的途径。

该句中的as well as是连词，连接两个并列成分。例如: He can speak German as well as French.常见的用法: 1.well是副词，意思是“好，优秀”，as well as是形容词

同级比较结构。 2.as well as是固定短语，意思是“和”，相当于"not only „ but also..."。

3.as well as连接两个并列成分作主语时，句子的谓语动词应该与前面那个名词或代词的人称或数保持一致。 4.as well as还可当作复杂介词用，意思是“除了„„之外，还有”；相当于"besides，apart from"。 5.as well，是副词短语，意思是“也”，相当于“too / also”常位于句尾，与too位置相当。 6.may / might as well do sth 表示“还是„„的好”。

【考例】(NMET 1994) John plays football ____, if not better than David.A.as well

B.as well as

C.so well

D.so well as [考查目标] as well as连接比较状语从句。

[答案与解析]B 该句中 if not better than相当于插入语，起干扰作用，如果不予考虑，原句就变成了同级比较结构 "John plays football as well as David"。

3.Before she could move，she heard a loud noise.她还没有来得及动弹，就听见很响的声音。

However, before she could think twice, the water was upon her.但还没有回过身来，洪水便逼近了她。

该两句中的before用作连词，后接时间状语从句。before用作连词，接时间状语从句时，表示“在„„之前”。但在不同的语境中，往往有比较灵活的译法。例如: He knocked me down before he saw me.他差一点把我撞倒，才看到我。 【考例】(2005广东) The American Civil War lasted four years the North won in the end.

A.after

B.before

C.when

D.then [考查目标] 时间状语从句的引导词选择。 [答案与解析]B

before 表示“直到„„”。

4.Tree after tree went down, cut down by the water, which must have been three meters deep.洪水想必深达三米，树一棵接一棵地倒了，被洪水冲断了。

该句中的must have been表示推测。例如：You look so tired.You must have stayed up last night.情态动词may，might，most．can，could常用来表示推测。may，might，must多用在肯定句中，can，could多用在否定句和疑问句中。may，might，must，can，could后接动词原形表示对现在的推测；may，might，must，can，could后接have done。表示对过去的推测。例如： You may be a profeor./ She must have met a fairy.【考例】(2005辽宁)This cake is very sweet.You ____ a lot of sugar in it.

A.should put

B.could have put

C.might put

D.must have put

28 [考查目标] 情态动词表示推测。

[答案与解析] D 前文说蛋糕很甜，由此可知一定是糖 放多了。对于过去的动作的推测应使用have done的 结构，所以应在B、D之间做选择，又因为could have done表示本可以做而没有做，所以选择D。

5....she heard a loud noise，which grew to a terrible roar.„„她听见了很响的声音，接着就变成了可怕的隆隆轰鸣声。 该句中的which引导非限制性定语从句。例如：He bought some reference books, which were all about science.他买了许多的参考资料．都是有关理科的。 which 作为关系代词．既可以引导限制性定语从句，也可以引导非限制性定语从句。例如：The train which left for Beijing pulled in on time.前往北京的火车按时进站了。His dog, which was now very old, became ill and died.他的狗，现在老了，生病死了。

【考例】(2005浙江) Jim paed the driving test, ____ surprised everybody in the office.

A.which

B.that

C.this

D.it [考查目标]非限制性定语从句。

[答案与解析]A which引导非限制性定语从句。指代 前面整个句子。that不能引导非限制性定语从句。 ☆句型诠释☆

现在进行时的用法(is / am / are + doing) 1.表示现在(说话的瞬间)正在进行或发生的动作。 Look! The monkey is climbing the banana tree.2.表示当前一段时间内的活动或现阶段正在进行的动作。(说话时动作不一定正在进行。) We are preparing for the meeting to be held next Friday now.3.表示说话人现在对主语的行为表示赞叹、惊讶、厌恶等。(常与always, constantly, continually, all the time, forever 等副词连用)，表反复的动作。He is always think- ing of others.(表赞许) She is always asking the same question.(表厌恶) You are always changing your mind.(表抱怨) 4.表示在最近计划或安排要进行的动作。常用于go, come, leave, start, arrive, return, work, stay 等表移动、方向的动词。He is starting the work in a few minutes./ He is leaving for Beijing tomorrow morning. [注意]

1.不用进行时的词有:

(1) 系动词: feel, sound, smell, taste, look, appear, seem, remain, prove 等。 (2) 表结果的感官动词: see, notice, hear 等。

(3) 非延续性的动词，此动作开始即是结束：enter, accept, receive等。 (4) 表心理状态，存在状态，拥有的动词：love, like, hate, care, dislike, respect, prefer, know, understand, forget, remember, believe, want, wish, hope, mind, agree, belong to, depend on, own, have等。

2.用进行时的特殊词有系动词get, turn, grow, become, go, come, fall 等表由一种状态转入另一种状态时，用进行时表示渐近。Today, many rivers that were polluted are getting cleaner and cleaner.当今，许多过去遭污染的河流又变得越来越清澈了。 [比较] 现在进行时表将来的用法与一般将来时的区别： (1) 现在进行时表近期的，事先已经计划安排好的 -- How are you getting to the airport? -- By taxi.Bob is coming with me to the airport.(2) will do 和 shall do ① 表客观将来。shall用于第一人称，will用于第

一、

二、三人称。I will / shall finish middle school next month.

29 ② 表有科学根据的预测。The weather report says it will rain tomorrow.③ 表客观必然。Man will make mistakes.(3) be going to ① 表现在打算在近期或将来要做某事。I'm going to finish my homework tonight.② 表根据已有迹象的预测。It's so dark outside, I think it's going to rain.③ be going to不与come, go连用，而用be coming, be going 形式。Mary is coming here this evening.[注意] 表计划、安排、规定要做的事，用“be + to do”。此外，表示按时刻表运行的动作常用一般现在时表将来。The meeting is to be held at 9:00 a.m./ Our plane leaves at 6:00 a.m..[牛刀小试3] 1.____ you call me to say you're not coming, I'll see you at the theatre.(2004 吉林) A.Though

B.Whether C.Until

D.Unle 2.Now that you've got a chance, you ____ make full use of it.(NMET 1999) A.had better to

B.might as well C.might as well as

D.would rather 3.It was evening ____ we reached the little town of Winchester.(2004 天津) A.that

B.until C.since

D.before 4.There is no light in the dormitory.They must have gone to the lecture, ____? (2004 上海春招) A.didn't they

B.don't they C.mustn't they

D.haven't they 5.The result of the experiment was very good, ____ we hadn't expected.(2000 北京春招) A.when

B.that

C.which

D.what DBDDC ☆交际速成☆

【考点1】Talking about intentions and plans.谈论意愿和打算 (2004江苏)

-- How long are you staying? -- I don't know.____.

A.That's OK

B.Never mind

C.It depends

D.It doesn't matter [答案与解析]C 本题考查具体语境下被询问打算时的应答。A项用于回答感谢和道歉，B、D两项用于回答道歉，C 项表示“看情况而定”。

【归纳】英语中常见表达意愿和打算的用语有： ① I'll go with you.② I'm going to see my head teacher this afternoon.③ I'd like to make a phone call to her after cla.④ I want / hope to find an English pen friend.⑤ I plan to go to Hangzhou this summer.⑥ We are ready to move to a new house.⑦ Bill intends to spend his vocation in California.⑧ I'm thinking of driving to Beijing.⑨ Where would you prefer going...? ⑩ How would you like to go to...? ? When are you going off to...? ? How are you going to...? 【考点2】Expreing good wishes祝愿

30 (2005广东)

Tom: Mike, our team will play against the Rockets this weekend.I'm sure we will win.

Mike: ____! A.Congratulations

B.Cheers

C.Best wishes

D.Good luck [答案与解析]D 考查祝愿用语。在比赛前表示祝愿的话用Good luck。Congratulations用于成功之后的祝贺。Cheers意为“干杯”。Best wishes多用于书面语，表示“万事如意”的意思。 【归纳】英语中常见表达祝愿的用语有： ① Have a good day / time! ② Have a good journey / trip! ③ Good luck! ④ Enjoy yourself! ⑤ Best wishes to you! ⑥ Happy New Year! ⑦ Happy birthday! ⑧ Merry Christmas! 应答语有： ① Thank you.② You, too.③ The same to you.【考点3】Describing emotions 描述人物的情感 (2001上海春招) -- I'm afraid I can't finish the book within this week.-- ____.

A.Please go ahead

B.That's all right

C.Not at all

D.Take your time [答案与解析]D 本题考查时表示遗憾情感的应答。A项表示“请吧，说吧”，用于回答许可或让对方先行。B、C两项是感谢或道歉的答语，D项表示“别着急，慢慢来”，符合语境。 【归纳】中学英语中描述人物情感的用语有：

① (恐惧) Help! / How terrible! / I'm afraid of.../ I'm afraid to.../ You scared me! / It scares me! ② (高兴) (It's) well done! / How wonderful! / That's great! / I'm pleased to...③ (惊奇) Really! / Oh dear! / Is that so? / What a surprise! / How surprising! ④ (忧虑) What's wrong? / what's the matter? / Anything wrong? / What should we do? ⑤ (安慰)There, there./ Don't be afraid.／Don't worry./ It's (quite) all right./ It'll be OK / all right.⑥ (满意) Good! / Well done! ／ Perfect! / That's fine./ That's better.⑦ (遗憾) I'm so sorry! / It's a great pity! / What a shame! / That's too bad! ⑧ (同情) I'm so sorry! / I'm so sorry (about your illne)./ I'm sorry to hear that.⑨ (愤怒) Damn! / How annoying! ⑩ (鼓励) Well done! / Come on! / Keep trying./ You can do it! [牛刀小试4] 1.-- I'd like to take a week's holiday.-- ____, we're too busy.A.Don't worry

B.Don't mention it C.Forget it

D.Pardon me

31 2.-- I was so sure that our experiment was going to succeed, but something went wrong at the last moment.-- ____, but don't give it up.A.Find out the reason

B.Never mind C.I'm sorry to hear that

D.You don't 'mean that 3.-- I just heard that the tickets for tonight's show have been sold out. -- Oh no! ____.A.I was looking forward to that B.It doesn't matter C.I knew it already D.It's not at all interesting 4.-- We are going to travel to Italy. -- ____.A.Good bye

B.Go ahead C.I like to go, too

D.Have a good time 5.-- I'd rather have some tea, if you don't mind.-- ____.A.Thank you very much B.Yes, I like so C.No, it's nothing

D.Of course, anything you want

CCADD ☆精典题例☆

1.Rainforests ___ and burned at such a speed that they will disappear from the earth in the near future.(NMET 2002春上海)

A.cut B.are cut C.are being cut D.had been cut 【解析】选C 本题是在语境中考查现在进行时的被动语态。本句意为“雨林以这样的速度被砍伐和焚烧，会导致它在不久的将来从地球上消失。”体会语境和句意便知此处选择C项，表示现阶段在进行的动作。

2.Twenty-three hours has paed after the explosion in the mine, but rescue efforts to recover the miing ____ carried out.

A.are still being

B.have already been

C.are always

D.will soon be 【解析】选A本句意为“矿井爆炸已过23小时了，但对失踪人员的搜索还在进行中。” 3.-- When are you leaving? -- My plane ____ at 10:45.A.takes off

B.took off

C.is about to take off

D.will take off 【解析】选A飞机是按时刻表运行的。 4.-- Excuse me, what time is it now?

-- Sorry, my watch ____.It ____ at the shop.

A.isn't working; is being repaired

B.doesn't work; is being repaired

C.isn't working; is repaired

D.doesn't work; is repaired 【解析】选B doesn't work说明“手表不工作”的状态，而不只是现在才坏了。后句意为“手表正在商店里修理”，故应用is being repaired。

5.John, who is considered ____ a warm-hearted man, is considering ____ his neighbor out of trouble.A.to be; to help

B.to be; helping C.being; to help

D.being; helping 【解析】选B be considered to be “被认为是„„”；consider doing “考虑做某事”。 6.He made a mistake, but then he corrected the situation ____ it got worse.A.until

B.when

C.before

D.as 【解析】选C意思是“在事情还未变得更糟之前及

32 时纠正错误”。

7.-- There is something wrong with my bike.-- It doesn't matter.I ____ lend you mine.A.am to B.am going to C.was going to

D.will 【解析】选D be to表示按计划安排将来的动作，be going to 表示最近打算做某事，will 在此是情态动词，表示“意志；意愿”。如：I will tell you all about it.8.Children at the beginning of this century ____ a lot and ____ themselves greatly even without television.A.used to read; enjoying

B.used to read; enjoyed C.were used to reading; enjoy D.were used to read; enjoying 【解析】选B 前后时态要保持一致。

高一英语各单元知识点总结及重难点解析Unit5-6 ☆重点句型☆

1.While still a student, she played roles in many plays.

连词 + 名词做时间状语

2.When asked about the secret of his succe, Steven Spielberg said„

连词+过去分词做时间状语 3.When drinking to someone's health, you raise your glaes.

连词 + 现在分词做时间状语 4.It's a custom in China to have some tea before the meal is served.

It 做形式主语 5.Many people like this film not just because..., but also

because...并列连词

6.Having good table manners means knowing... 动名词做主宾语 ☆重点词汇☆

1.comment v.评论 2.marry v.结婚 3.create v.创造 4.attack v.进攻 5.cruelty n.残酷 6.escape v.逃跑

7.advice n.忠告；建议

8.afford v.花得起(钱、时间) 9.encourage v.鼓励 10.research n.研究

11.interrupt v.打断；打扰 12.apologize v.道歉 13.pray v.请求；祈祷 14.forgive v.原谅；宽恕 15.match v.相配；相适应 16.manners n.礼貌 17.impreion n.印象

18.live adj.& adv.活的；直播的(地) 19.custom n.习惯；风俗 20.introduce vt.介绍；引进 ☆重点短语☆

33 1.take off 脱掉；起飞；成功 2.go wrong 出错；出问题

3.can't help doing 情不自禁做某事 4.take one's place 代替某人 5.run after 追逐；追踪 6.win a prize 获奖

7.think highly of 赞扬„„；对„„高度评价

8.call for 需要；索取 9.in all 总共

10.play a role 扮演角色(作用) 11.make money 挣钱 12.win over 争取过来 13.work on 从事，致力于

14.owe succe to 把成功归功于某人 15.start with 以„„开始 16.run away from school逃学 17.on the air 正在播出的 18.do research 进行调查 19.speed up 加速

20.follow the fashion 追随时尚 ☆短语闯关☆

下列短语都是这两个单元学过的重要短语，请你根据 汉语在横线上填入一个正确的词，每个词4分，80分才 能过关。你一定能过关，做好了闯关的准备吗?那么我 们就开始吧? l.____ screen 银幕，电影(业) 2.take ____ 成功；成名；脱掉(衣服)；(飞机)起飞 3.____ wrong 走错路；误入歧途；不对头；出毛病 4.owe sth ____ sb 把„„归功于某人 5.____ all 总共；总之 6.stay ____ 不在家，外出 7.____ school 小学

8.lock sb ____ 将某人锁于某处不得进出；将某人监禁起来 9.run ____ 追赶

10.bring sb ____ 送回某人 11.____ the air正在播出的

12.think highly ____ 对„„高度评价 13.leave ____ 省去；遗漏；不考虑 14.stare ____ 盯着

15.make ____ about sb 以某人为笑柄

16.drink (a toast) ____ 为„„祝酒；为„„干杯 17.win ____ 战胜

18.____ comments on对„„加以评论

34 19.look sb ____ 看望，拜访某人

20.____ a role in 在„„中扮演角色；在„„方面起作用 21.____ a prize获奖

22.to sb for (doing) sth因某事向某人道歉

23.make a good impreion ____ 给„„留下好印象 24.____ silent 保持沉默 25.pay a visit ____ 拜访 ☆交际用语☆

1.What do you think has happened? 2.What do you know about…?

3.How do you like…? / What do you think of…? / What db you feel...? 4.May I interrupt you for a moment? 5.Excuse me / Forgive me for.../ I apologize for… 6.I'm (very / so / terribly) sorry.It's all my fault.7.That's all right./ That's OK./ No problem.8.I wish you all the best.9.I'm sorry.I didn't mean to...10.Let's drink (a toast) to...! ☆单词聚焦☆ 1.afford

(1) (和can，could，be able to连用) 有 (时间、经济等) 条件(做某事) + to do

We can't afford to pay such a price.

afford + n./ pron.(出得起；买得起等)

They donot consider whether they can afford it or not.

(2) 经得起 (做某事或发生某事) (多+to do)

He could not afford to lose his fortune entirely.2.apologize的用法

▲ 构词：apology n.辩解，道歉 ▲ 搭配：

① apologize to sb for (doing) sth = make an apology的 sb for (doing) sth向某人为某事(为做了某事)道歉 ② apologize for oneself 为自己辩解或辩护

【考例】[NMET 1993]The captain ____ an apology to the paengers for the delay caused by bad weather.

A.made

B.said

C.put

D.paed [考查目标] apologize及其名词的用法和搭配。 [答案与解析]A make an apology的意思是“道歉”。 3.choice的用法 ▲搭配：

① make a choice 选择

② make choice of 挑选，选择，选定 ③ make / take one's choice 任意挑选

④ have no choice but to do sth 非„„不可，除„„之外别无他法

【考例】[MET 1993] We've mied the last bus, I'm afraid we have no ____ but to take a taxi.

A.way

B.choice C.poibility

D.selection [考查目标] choice的意思和习惯搭配。

35 [答案与解析]B choice是choose的名词形式．意思是 “选择”，在本句中构成固定搭配have no choice but to do sth“不得不干„„”。 4.determine的用法

▲ 构词：determination n.决心，决断，决意；决定，确定 ▲ 搭配：

① determine to do sth 决定做某事 ② determine on / upon (doing) sth 决定 ③ a man of determination 有决断力的人

▲ 辨析：decide；determine这两个词都有“决定”的意思。decide的含义是“不再迟疑不定”，而 determine含义是“把某件事确定下来”。

在be determined to do„这个固定的结构中。过去分词determined的词义为“下定了决心”。

decide的名词为decision，determine的名词为determination。例如：At first，she decided to go to the police，„起初，她决定去找警察„„

▲ 友情提示: decide后跟宾语从句时，其含义有时是“断 定”。I decided that I must have taken a wrong turning somewhere.我断定我一定是在某处拐错弯了。The determination of the meaning of a word is often difficult without a context.脱离上下文来确定一个词的含义常常是困难的。 注：在determine to do...，determine on (upon)...和determine that...。(宾语从句)三个搭配中，determine的词义和decide几乎没有多大差异。He determined / decided to learn medicine.他决定学医。

注：decide sb to do sth 决定使某人做某事What decided you to give up your job? 什么因素使你决定放弃你的工作? 【考例】[2001京皖春招] Before Sam can repair his bicycle, he must know why it does not work.For example, he must ____ the parts that are wrong.

A.check

B.determine

C.correct

D.recover [考查目标]determine的用法。

[答案与解析]B determine和decide在一般情况下意思相同。 5.encourage的用法 ▲ 构词：

① encouraging adj.鼓励的，给予希望的，振奋人心的。令人欢欣鼓舞的 ② encouraged adj.被激励的，受到鼓舞的 ③ encouragement n.鼓励，激励 ④ discourage v.使泄气；劝阻

▲ 搭配：① encourage sb to do sth 鼓励某人做某事 ② be encouraged by 受„„鼓励／鼓舞 【考例】 [2004北京]My advisor encouraged ___a summer course to improve my writing skills.

A.for me taking

B.me taking

C.for me to take

D.me to take [考查目标] encourage的用法。

[答案与解析]D encourage sb to do sth鼓励某人干某事。句意为：我的导师鼓励我参加一个夏季课程来提高我的写作技巧。

6.escape (vi, vt ) escaped, escaping

(1) 逃走；跑掉 + from / out of = run away from

The soldier escaped from the enemy's prison.

(2)逃脱；逃避 + n./ doing

He narrowly escaped death / being killed.

There's no way to escape doing the work.

36

escape还可表示：

①（液体等）漏出 gas escaping from the pipe 煤气从管中漏出Water escaped rapidly from the drainpipe.水从排水管中迅速流出。

② 避免escaped death 免于一死There is no escaping him.怎么也避不开他。

③ 疏忽，忽略 Nothing escaped his attention.什么也逃不过他的注意。 You cannot expect that something may escape the teacher's attention.你不要奢望有什么能逃过老师的注意。 escape n

① 逃走The thief made his escape.小偷逃走了。

②（气体）漏出，泄出；解闷She reads love stories as an escape.她读爱情小说解闷。 7.hunt的用法

▲ 构词：hunter n.猎人，搜寻者 ▲ 搭配：

① hunt for / after追猎；寻找，搜寻 ② hunt out 找出；调查出

【考例】He wandered in the street, ____ a new jacket for his nephew.

A.hunting for

B.waiting for

C.shooting for

D.aiming for [考查目标]本题考查hunt for的意思。

[答案与解析]A hunt for原来是“猎取”的意思，引中为“搜寻，寻找”。 8.impreion n.印象

(1) impreion (on sb.) (给某人)印象His speech made a strong impreion on his audience.

(2) impreion (of sth.) (对某事物)印象；想法That's my first impreion of the new college.

(3) impre sb.with sth.给予某人深刻印象 = impre sth.on sb.使某人铭记 The teacher impreed on his students the importance of speaking.= The teacher impre- ed his students with the importance of speaking.9.interrupt的用法vt, vi ① 阻断；中断 Don't interrupt me.别打断我。Traffic in the city was interrupted by a snowstorm.市内交通被暴风雪所阻断。

② 打岔；插嘴 It is rude to interrupt.打断别人的话，是不礼貌的。 “Don't interrupt,” he said.“别插话, ”他说。 ▲构词：

① interrupter n.打岔者，打断者

② interruption n.打岔．打断，使中断的事物

【考例】[2005山西模拟] Be quiet! It's rude to ____ people when they are talking.

A.stop

B.introduce

C.prevent

D.interrupt [考查目标] interrupt的词义。

[答案与解析]D interrupt的意思是“打断；使中断”． 后接指人或指物的各种名词。 10.marry

(1) vi.结婚

He didn't marry until he was fifty.

(2) vt.和„„结婚

Jean is going to marry Hubert.

(3) vt.(父母)嫁(女儿) He married his daughter to a busineman.

(4) vt.(教士等) 为„„主持结婚仪式 We've come to ask if you will marry them.

[比较]

(1) get married (to sb.) 强调动作

His oldest girl got married last month.

37

(2) be married (to sb.) 强调状态

How long have you been married? 11.moment的用法 n.① 片刻；瞬间 He will be here in a moment.他一会儿就来。At the moment I am working. 此刻我正在工作。 ② 时机；机遇；时宜 Choose your moment to visit him.你选个合适的时机去拜访他。 ③ 重要性 a matter of great moment 一件极重要的事情 ▲搭配：

① at any moment 随时；在任何时候；马上 ② at the last moment 在最后关头 ③ at the moment 此刻；(正当)那时 ④ every moment 时时刻刻 ⑤ for a moment 片刻

⑥ in a moment 一会儿，不久；立即，马上 ⑦ the moment(that)...一„„就„„

【考例】[NMET 2004 II] "Can I? I don't think I can," Racy said with a laugh."But I do have ____ when things come to me for no reason."

A.events B.chances

C.feelings

D.moments [考查目标] moment的词义。

[答案与解析] D moment可以指“时刻”，在本句中用了复数，意思是“一些次”。 12.owe的用法owed, owing ▲ 搭配： ①（常与for连用）欠，欠债I owe you for your help.我感谢你的帮助。(也可以是owe sth.或owe sb.sth) The food cost ￡4 , but I only paid ￡3 so I still owe ￡1.食品要4英镑，可我只付了3英镑，因此我还欠1英镑。I owe you an apology.我该向你道歉。

☆ owe sb sth for sth 或 owe sth to sb for sth 为„欠某人„

② 对„负有义务；感恩；感激We owe our parents a lot.我们十分感激父母。

③（常与to连用）归功于；由于She owes her succe to good luck.她把成功归功于幸运。The young writer owed his succe to his teacher's encouragement.年轻作家把自己的成功归于他老师的鼓励。 【考例】[2004湖北] "How much do I ____ you?" "Oh, no," Paul said.

A.Owe

B.lend

C.give

D.offer [考查目标]考查owe的词义和用法。

[答案与解析]A owe表示“欠”的时候是及物动词，可以接双宾语。 13.reason n.原因；理由

(1) + to do sth.You haven't any reason to leave me.(2) + for sth./ doing People must have a reason for saying such things.(3) + 从句；从句用why / for which引导 That is the reason why you should leave.(4) for + reason，为了某种原因He is retiring for reasons of health.[比较] cause“原因；起因”

the cause of the fire 火灾的起因(引起某种后果的起因) the reason for being late 迟到的理由(做某件事的理由) 14.role

(1) (戏剧中的) 角色Oliver played (acted) the role / part of Hamlet.

(2) (现实生活中的) 身份；作用

38

What is your role on the Committee? (3) play a...role in...= play a...part in在„„中扮演„„角色或作用The headmaster plays an important role / part in the good running of a school.15.serve v.

(1) 为„„服务／工作 A slave serves his master.

(2) 接待(顾客) The shop aistant is serving a customer.

(3) 侍候吃饭，端(菜)；供应(饭菜) Lunch is served now.

(4) serve as 充任(某职务)作„„用 She served as a model for several painters./ This box will serve as / for a seat.16.speed的用法 ▲搭配：

① at a high speed 以很大的速度

② at full / top speed 用全速，开足马力，尽力(快)地； ③ with great / an speed 用全速，开足马力 ④ speed up 加速，快点

【考例】We had tried our best but the bo still shouted, " ____!"

A.Speed up

B.No hurry

C.Wait a minute

D.Slow down [考查目标]本题考查speed及其构成的短语的意思。

[答案与解析]A speed up意思是“加速，快点”的意思。 17.stare的用法 vi, vt -- stared, staring 凝视，注视

He stared at the word trying to remember what it meant.他盯着这个单词，努力想记起它的意思。 [习惯用语] stare one in the face近在眼前；摆在眼前

▲辨析：gaze；stare；glare这组动词的一般含义是“凝视”。 gaze表示“目不转睛地看”，并含有“惊叹”、“羡慕”或“入迷”的意思。例如：She gazed at the carpet for some time, and then added, "You don't need bookcases at all." 她对地毯凝视了一会儿，然后补充说：“你根本不需要书柜。” stare 特别表示“睁大眼睛凝视”，并含有“惊奇”、“傲慢” 或“茫然”的意思。例如：The noble stared at the blank sheet of paper for a few seconds.那位贵族对那张空白纸凝视了几秒钟。

glare 表示“凶狠而且带有威胁性的瞪眼睛”的意思。例如：The trapped eagle glared at his captors.被诱捕到的雄鹰凶狠地瞪着捕获它的人。

【考例】[NMET 1999] ____ him and then try to copy what he does.

A.Mind

B.Glance at

C.Stare at

D.Watch [考查目标] stare 等近义词辨别。

[答案与解析]D watch意思是“观察”，是长时问关注；而stare at却是“盯着”。含有惊奇、傲慢的感情色彩。 18.trouble

(1) 麻烦；烦恼；烦心的事 (可数，不可数) It is a pity to give you so much trouble./ Life is full of troubles.

(2) 困难；费事 (不可数) have trouble with sth./ have trouble (in) doing sth.(= difficulty) Did you have much trouble in finding the post office? / I hope you won't have any trouble with the work.

[相关短语]

(1) ask for trouble 自寻烦恼；自找麻烦 What made you write such a letter? It was asking for trouble.

(2) (be) in trouble 有烦事；有困难；出事；惹麻烦 He never came except when he was in trouble.

(3) put sb.to trouble 给某人造成麻烦；增添麻烦 I am sorry for putting you to so much trouble.

(4) take trouble to do sth.费心做某事；费心 It was good of you to take the trouble to help us.[牛刀小试1] 用所给单词的适当形式填空：(speed，owe，encourage，decide，moment，apologize) 1.will never forget the ____ given by Mr.Wang, which helped me overcome a lot difficulty.

39 2.I have made a ___that every department in our company should buy a computer of this kind.3.I recognized the man the ____ I saw him at the corner. 4.Since it was a bit later，we had to ____ up.5.We must ____ our succe to our parents and teachers.6.The parents came from the far-away village, making an ____ for their naughty son.☆词语比较☆

1.win, beat, defeat 表示获胜、取胜的词语

(1) win v.赢„„，获胜，接比赛或奖项 win a game / a prize / an honor / a race./ Our team won the game 8 to 7./ He won by five points./ He won her love at last./ He won the first place in the competition.

(2) beat + 对手，表打败(尤指体育比赛) I can easily beat him at golf.

(3) defeat 表战胜，接对手The enemy was defeated in the battle.2.in the end, finally, at last

三者均可表示“(经过周折、等待、耽误)最后，终于”之意。不同的是： finally 一般用在句中动词前面，而 at last 与 in the end 的位置则较为灵活；

三者中at last 语气最为强烈，且可单独作为感叹句使用。After putting it off three times, we finally managed to have a holiday in Dalian./ At last he knew the meaning of life./ At last! Where on earth have you been? / But in the end he gave in.

另外，finally还可用在列举事项时，引出最后一个内容，相当于lastly。 Firstly, we should make a plan; secondly, we should carry it out; finally we should make a conclu- sion.3.by sea, by the sea, in the sea, on the sea, at sea

(1) by sea “走海路，乘船”，用来表示交通方式，同 by ship 同义。 These heavy boxes should be sent by sea.

(2) by the sea “在海边”，相当于 by (at) the seaside。The children enjoyed themselves by the sea on Children's Day.

(3) in the sea “在海里，在海水中” There are many plants and animals in the sea.

(4) on the sea “在海面上”，“在海岸边”。I want to live in a town with a beautiful position on the sea.

(5) at sea 在海上；在航海 When he woke up, the ship was at sea.4.be afraid, be afraid to do sth., be afraid of (doing) sth.

(1) be afraid 意为“担心，害怕”，多用于口语，常用来表示一种歉意，或遗憾，后可接 so 或 not，也可接 that 从句。I'm afraid (that) 其语意相当于 I'm sorry, but...。

-- Are we on time? 我们准时吗? -- I'm afraid not.恐怕不准时。I'm afraid you'll get caught in the rain.

(2) be afraid to do sth 常表示“由于胆小而不敢做某事”。She is afraid to be here alone./ He is afraid to jump into the river from the bridge.

(3) be afraid of (doing) sth.常表示“担心或害怕某事(发生)”。I was afraid of hurting her feelings.5.live, living, alive, lively

(1) live adj.

① 活的；活生生的；(只修饰生物；只作前置定语) The laboratory is doing experiments with several live monkeys.

② 实况直播的 (不是录音)It wasn't a recorded show.It was live.

③ 带电的；燃着的；可爆炸的 This is a live wire.

(2) living adj.活着的，有生命的(作表语或定语) She was, he thought, the best living novelist in England./ The old man is still living.(或alive)

(3) alive adj.① 活着的；② 有活力的；有生气

作后置定语：Who's the greatest man alive?

作表语：Was the snake alive or dead? / My grandmother is more alive than a lot of young people.

作补语：Let's keep the fish alive.

(4) lively adj.活泼的；有生气的；活跃的(作表语或定语) The music is bright and lively.6.take off, take down, take in, take on, take up

40

(1) take off

① (飞机)起飞 A helicopter is able to take off and land straight up or down.

② 脱下(衣裳等)；取下 He took off his wet shoes./ Who took the knob off the door?

③ 休假；请假；歇工 When his wife was sick he took off from work.

④ (指观念、产品) 大受欢迎；(事业)突然发达，成功The new type of cell phones has really taken off./ His busine began to take off when he was in his forties.

(2) take down

① 拿下来；取下来 He reached up to the third shelf of the bookcase and took down a dictionary.

② 记下来 He read out the names and his secretary took them down.

(3) take in

① 接受 (房客，客人等)；收留 The farmers took in the lost travelers for the night.

② 理解；领会；明白 The boys could not take in his meaning.

③包括；涉及 The study of physics takes in many different subjects.

④使上当；欺骗We were completely taken in by her story.

(4) take on

① 接受；从事(某工作) After his father died, Bill took on the management of the factory.

② 雇用Is the supermarket taking on any more ais- tant?

③ 具有(新面貌、意思等) The city has taken on a new look.

(5) take up

① 从事某项活动；发展某种爱好 So many young men want to take up writing.

② 开始做(某项工作)；开始学习(某个课程) Then she took up the task of getting the breakfast./ He dropped medicine and took up physics.

③ 占去 (时间或空间) The meeting took up the whole morning./ The table takes up too much room.

④ 接受I'd like to take up your offer of a ride into town.7.call for, call on, call up

(1) call for

① 来找(某人)；来取(某物) I'll call for you at your house.

②要求；需要Succe in school calls for much hard work.

(2) call on

① call on / upon sb.拜访；去会(某人) I hope to call on you at your office at 3 o’clock today.

② call on / upon sb.to do sth.请／叫某人做某事He called upon me to speak immediately.

③ 号召；呼吁；要求 The President called on his people to serve the country.

(3) call up

① 给„„打电话 (英 ring up) I tried to call you up last night, but no one answered the phone.

② 征召入役；调用 (后备部队) Three boys in our street were called up last week.8.too much, much too

(1) too much “太多”之意，可以作形容词，修饰不可数

名词，也可作副词，修饰动词。 There is too much rain here in spring./ She talked too much at the meeting.

(2) much too “简直太，过于”，只能作副词，用来修饰

形容词或别的副词，不能修饰动词。This book is much too difficult for me./ The old man walks much too slowly.9.custom, habit

(1) custom 指传统风俗、习俗，也可指生活习惯，后接不定式。They broke some of the old customs./ It is the custom in China to eat dumplings during the spring Festival.

(2) habit 指个人生活习惯。“(有)养成„„习惯”常

41

用be in / fall into / get into / form / have the habit of doing sth.句型；“戒掉„„习惯”常用 give up / kick / break away from / get out of the habit of doing sth.句型。It's easy to get into a bad habit but its hard to give it up./ The drug easily get one into the habit of smoking.10.arise, rise, raise

raise vt.“使„„上升；升起；提高”等； rise vi.“上升；升起”；

arise vi.“站起来(stand up)”，“起床(get up)”，rise和arise用作站起，起床都属正式用法；arise主要表示“出现、发生”等意思。She raised her voice in anger.(抬高) The wind raised the fallen leaves from the ground.(刮起) The child rose from the ground and ran to his mother.(=The child raised himself from the ground and ran to his mother.) (爬起) She rises before it is light.(起床) Difficulties will arise as we do the work.(出现) ☆短语归纳☆

1.can't help doing sth.禁不住做某事，不由得不做某事

She couldn't hep smiling.

[比较]

(1) can't help but do 不得不„„；不能不 When the streets are full of melting snow, you can't help but get your shoes wet.

(2) cannot but 不能不，只能He could not but feel disappointed.[归纳] (1) help (sb.) (to) do sth.Help me get him back to bed at once./ By helping them we are helping save ourselves.(2) help...with sth.帮助„„做某事 In those days he used to help her mother with her gardening.

(3) help oneself / sb.to sth.给自己 / 别人夹菜 / 拿烟

等；擅自拿用 May I help you to some more vegetables?

(4) help...in sth.在„„方面帮助某人 She offered to help Rose in the housekeeping when I am not here.

(5) help out 帮忙 (做事；克服困难等) I've often helped Bob out when he's been a bit short of money.2.含go的短语

① go around 到处走／跑．(疾病)流传，(谣言)传开；go after 追求；go ahead 说吧，请吧，做吧；go away 离开，出去

② go back 走网头路，翻悔改变；go bad 变坏；go boating 去划船 ③ go fishing 去钓鱼；go for a walk去 散步 ④ go hiking 去徒步旅行；go home 回家

⑤ go in for 喜爱，从事于；go into 进入，加入 ⑥ go mad 发疯

⑦ go off 离去，去世；go on 继续，进展，依据；go on doing 继续做；go out 出去，发出去，熄灭，不时兴；go over 研究，检查，搜查

⑧ go shopping 去商店；go skating 去滑冰；go straight along 沿着；go swimming 去游泳 ⑨ go through 通过，经受，仔细检查；go to bed 上床 ⑩ go up 上升

? go wrong 走错路，误入歧途

[例句] We'll go through the items one by one.我们要逐条研究。She has gone back to her old habits.她又回到了已往的习惯。Come on Sunday by yourself - we can go over the house together.星期天你要过来．我们一起检查一下房子。His speech went on for so long that people began to fall asleep.他的演讲持续很长时间，结果人们开始想睡。That expreion has gone out.Nobody Uses it today.那个短语已经过时了，现在没有人在用它。The young fellow hasn't realized that he has gone wrong.这个年轻人还没有意识到他已经误入歧途。Tired of going shopping with his wife，Mr.Liu pretended to have something important to do.厌烦与妻子一起去购物，刘先生假装有重要的事情要做。

42 【考例2】(2004北京) I don't ____ rock' n' roll.It's much too noisy for my taste.

A.go after

B.go away with

C.go into

D.go in for [考查目标] 此题主要考查四个动词短语的意思。

[答案与解析]D

go after 追求；go away with 带走；go into进入，加入；go in for 喜爱，爱好。根据句子意思“摇滚音乐太嘈杂。不合乎我的口味．所以我不喜欢”。

【考例】(NMET 1998) Nobody noticed the thief slip into the house because the lights happened to ____.

A.be put up

B.give in

C.be turned on

D.go out [考查目标]此题主要考查四个短语的意思。

[答案与解析] D

put up 挂起；give in 屈服；turn on 打开；go out 熄灭。本句话意思是“没有人注意到贼溜进了屋子，因为灯碰巧熄灭了”。 3.go wrong

(1) 走错路；弄错方向

(2) 失败；不顺利All our plans went wrong./ Everything went wrong in those days.

(3)发生故障

The clock went wrong.

[比较]表示“变为”的系动词

(1) go 表示由积极向消极方面变化Fish soon goes bad in hot weather.又如：go mad / pale / blind / hungry

(2) become / get 表示由积极向消极或消极向积极方

面变化 The weather is getting quite warm./ Gradually he became silent.

(3) turn 多接表颜色的词 This ink turns black when it dries./ He used to be a teacher till he turned writer.

注意：become a writer

(4) grow 侧重变化过程 The sea is growing calm.

(5) fall 进入某种状态

All three children fell asleep.4.owe...to...受到恩惠；归功于„„

(1) 欠(钱)owe sb.money = owe money to sb.I owe ￡50 to my tailor.= I owe my tailor ￡50.(2) 得过(某人的)好处；欠(某人的)人情债

We owe a great deal to our parents and teachers.(3) 应当给予 You owe me an apology.(4) „„应归功于；„„都亏得

We owe the general theory of relativity to Einstein.[拓展]表示“由于”的词组：owing to / because of / thanks to / due to / as a result of 5.take one's place (1) 入座，站好位置，取得地位Take your places, please.We are about to start.(2) take one's place = take the place of sb.代替(职务或工作等)；接替Electric trains have now taken the place of steam trains in England.[比较] (1) in place (of)代替；„„而不用The grown-ups had coffee but the children wanted milk in place of coffee.(2) take one's seat 在自己座位上坐下；有时等于 take one's place：More men entered and took their seats.6.think highly of 赞扬 表赞赏的词有：

(1) think / speak highly / well / much...of: The people think very highly of him.表认为不好的词有：

43 (2) think little / badly / poorly / nothing...of: Joan thought little of walking two miles to school.7.含“动词 + away”的短语 ① do away with 去掉

② get away 逃脱，(使)离开 ③ go away 离去，出去

④ put away 放好，把„„收拾起来，存(钱)以备它日之用 ⑤ run away 逃走，离开

⑥ smooth away 去除，克服

⑦ stay away (from) 不在家，外出

⑧ take away 拿走，带走，夺去，使离去 ⑨ throw away 扔掉．浪费．坐失(良机) [例句]Don't throw away such a good chance.Or you'll regret.不要放弃这么好的机会，不然的话，你会后悔

的。Put away the tools before you leave.离开前把工具收拾好。Why did you stay away from school? 你为什么不去上学? I had hoped to take a good holiday this year but I wasn't able to get away.我本打算今年好好去度假，但是我离不开。 【考例】(2004重庆)Before the war broke out, many people ____ in safe places poeions they could not take with them．

A.threw away

B.put away

C.gave away

D.carried away [考查目标]此题主要考查“动词+away”四个短语的意思。 [答案与解析]B throw away 扔掉；put way 放好，把 „„收拾起来；give away 分发．泄露；carry away 冲 走。本句话意思是“在战争爆发以前，许多人把他们不 能带走的财产藏在了安全的地方”。 8.含“动词 + off”的短语 ① drop off 放下，下车 ② fall off (从„„)掉下来

③ get off (从„„)下来，动身，起飞，脱下来 ④ give off 发出，放出 ⑤ jump off 跳离

⑥ put off 推迟，延期

⑦ set off 出发，引起，启程

⑧ see sb off 为某人送行，为„„送行 ⑨ switch off 关掉

⑩ take off 脱，去掉，起飞，匆匆离开，成名 ? throw off 匆忙脱掉

? turn off 关掉，避开，拐弯

[例句]The electricity supply must be turned off at the mains before you change the lighting circuit.在改变火线前，主干线的电力供应必须切断。 Mrs Garey as usual went to the door to see him off.Garey夫人像通常一样把他送到门口。He had to put off an appointment with me on account of illne.因为疾病的缘故，他不得不推迟了与我的约会。Before the body of the car can be properly repaired, all the external fittings must be taken off.车身适当修理前，所有外部的配件必须拿下来。The fire doesn't seem to be giving off much heat.这炉火好像不大热。

【考例】(2005广东) John is leaving for London tomorrow and I will ____ him ____ at the airport.

A.send...away

B.leave...off

44

C.see...off

D.show...around [考查目标]此题主要考查短语see off的用法。 [答案与解析]C

see off 意为“给某人送行”；send away意为“派遣”；leave off意为“停止，不再穿”；show around意为“带领某人参观”。 [牛刀小试2] 在下列句子的空白处填上适当的介词或副词。

1.My grandmother had put ____ over$50,000 when she was sixty—five years old.2.His mother had thought it would be good for his charac- ter to get ____ home and earn some money on his own.3.The market was filled ____ salted fish, giving the worst smell that you can imagine.4.-- What do you think the contest? -- I was told that the English Speech Contest went ____ succefully last night.5.If you had gone ____ your test paper carefully before handing it in you would have made fewer mistakes.☆句型诠释☆

1.The reason why he could not go there was that his grades were too low.他没能上电影学院是因为他的分数太低了。 该句巾的why引导一个定语从句，而that引导表语从句。

1.句中that引导的表语从句说明主语reason的具体内容，往往被看作是固定句型：The reason is / was that clause.当主语是reason / cause时，一般不能用because或why引导表语从句，以免造成语意重复。当主语是This / That时，可以由because / why引导表语从句。例如：One reason is that people traveled to America from all European countries.【考例】(NMET 1999) -- I drove to Zhuhai for the air show last week.-- Is that ____ you had a few days off?

A.why B.when C.what D.where [考查目标] 表语从句。

[答案与解析]A 句子的意思是“那就是你请了几天假的原因吗?”因此可知答案为why。

2.why在句中是关系副词，引导定语从句，修饰先行词reason，同时它在定语从句中作状语，此时why = for which，但要注意：关系词在定语从句中作主语或宾语时，要用关系代词that或which。

【考例】(2002上海春招)Is this the reason ____ at the meeting for his carelene in his work?

A.he explained

B.what he explained

C.how he explained

D.why he explained [考查目标]定语从句。

[答案与解析]A what，how不能引导定语从句，排除B、C两项；the reason在定语从句中作explained的宾语，可填that / which，或者也可以省略。

2.Many people who saw the film were afraid to swim in the sea when they remembered the scenes in which people were eaten by the shark.好多看过这个片子的人一想起片中鲨鱼食人的场面．就不敢下海游泳了。 该句是一个复杂长句，从when到句子末尾是状语从句，在从句中包含一个由which引导的定语从句，修饰先行词scenes; 在前面的主句里面。包含一个由who引导的定语从句，修饰先行词people。例如：Those who want to go camping next Sunday sign your name here before cla is over.定语从句关系词的选择，要遵循“瞻前顾后”的原则，所谓“瞻前”即看前面的先行词指人还是指物；“顾后”即后面的定语从句，看关系词在定语从句中作什么成分。例如：This is the factory where he works.(状语) / This is the factory (that / which) he visited.(宾语) 【考例】(NMET 1992)In the dark street，there wasn't a single person ____ she could turn for help.

A.that

B.who

C.from whom

D.to whom [考查目标]定语从句。

[答案与解析]D “turn to sb for help”为固定短语，意思是“向某人求助”，所以选to whom。

3.When asked about the secret of his succe, Steven Spielberg said that he owes much of his succe and happine to his

45 wife and children.当有人问起他成功的秘诀时。史蒂文?斯皮尔伯格说起他的成功和幸福主要来自于妻子和孩子。 该句中的 "when" 是时间状语从句的省略形式。在状语从句中，如果从句主语与主句主语一致或从句主语是it，而且从句谓语动词是be或包含be时，常常将从句主语与be省略。例如：Although born in Chicago, the author is famous for his stories about New York.

【考例】 (2003上海春招) Unle ___to speak，you should remain silent at the conference.

A.invited

B.inviting

C.being invited

D.having invited [考查目标]状语从句的省略现象。

[答案与解析]A unle为连词，后面省略了you are，所以选invited。

4.Having good table manners means knowing, for example, how to use knives and forks, when to drink a toast and how to behave at the table.在餐桌上，懂礼节意味着你知道如何使用刀叉，何时祝酒以及如何在用餐时举止得体。 该句中having good manners为v-ing形式作主语。例如：Collecting stamps is one of his hobbies.▲友情提示：在v -ing 形式前加形容词性物主代词或名词所有格，构成v -ing复合结构，在句中作主语、宾语。 【考例5】(2001上海)Fishing is his favorite hobby, and ____.

A.he'd like to collect coins as well

B.he feels like collecting coins, too

C.to collect coins is also his hobby

D.collecting coins gives him great pleasure [考查目标]v -ing 作主语。 [答案与解析]D

A、B、C三项句法都无错误，但在and连接的并列句中，两个简单句的主语要保持一致的形式 fishing and collecting coins分别做两个简单句的主语。

5.It's polite to finish eating everything on your plate, so don't take more food than you need.餐盘里的东西要吃光才礼貌，所以不要多拿。

该句中的it为形式主语，真正的主语为to finish eating „例如：It's not right to tell lies.撒谎是不对的。 it作为形式主语，真正的主语是动词不定式短语。常见的句型有： 1.It + be + adj.+ to do sth 2.It + be + n.+ to do sth 3.It + be + PP.to do sth 【考例】(2001上海) In fact ____ is a hard job for the police to keep order in an important football match.

A.this

B.that

C.there

D.it [考查目标] 形式主语。

[答案与解析]D 只有it才可以作形式主语。 【句型归纳】

1.When / While / Though / Unle / If + n./ adj./ 现在分词／过去分词„„ 状语从句有些成分有时可省略，一般是主语和be省略；有时it和be可以省略： He made no answer when (he is) spoken to./Though (he was) born in Chicago, the author is most famous for his stories about New York./ Come back early if (it is) poible.[注意]用法详见Chapter 10语法活用“省略和插入语”。 2.Not only / just„but (also) 连接相同的句子成分

Not only the teacher but all the students are going to visit the Science Museum.(连接主语时根据就近原则) / They not only sang but (also) danced for a whole night./ Many people go to see this film not just because the film is interesting, but also the leading actors and actrees are all world famous./ Not only do we learn for our country, but we'll work for her in the future.(连接句子时，not only后的句子要部分倒装) [牛刀小试3] 1.The reason ____ you failed, I think, was ____ you had turned a deaf ear to your mother's advice.

46 A.that; because

B.why; because C.why; that

D.for that; that 2.The English play ____ my students acted at the New Year's party was a great succe.(2004 全国卷I) A.for which

B.at which C.in which

D.on which 3.When ____, the museum will be open to the public next year.(2002 上海春招) A.completed

B.completing C.being completed

D.to be completed 4.____ the meeting himself gave them a great deal of encouragement.(2003 上海) A.The president will attend B.The president to attend C.The president attend D.The president's attending 5.I don't think ____ poible to master a foreign language without much memory work. (NMET 1990) A.this

B.that

C.its

D.it

【交际速成】

1.Giving opinions and Making comments 询问看法与作出评价 (2003北京西城) -- How do you find the talk given by Mr．Smith? -- ____.

A.Very well B.Excited

C.Boring D.Not at an [答案与解析]C 本题考查对事物提出看法或作出评价的用语。A、B两项词法错误，若改为Very good或Exciting，就可回答提问了。D项不合语境。此句完整为：(It's) Boring.【归纳】英语中询问看法的用语有： ① How do you like / find...? ② What do you think of / about...? ③ What do you feel about...? 2.Describing sequences按次序描述事件发生的过程

Mother first did some washing and then did some cooking, ____ she had a rest.

A.finally

B.in the end

C.by the end

D.at last [答案与解析] A

本题考查如何描述事情发生的顺序。finally 用于在列举一系列内容之后。要引出最后一项内容的场合；也可与at last互换，表示所盼望的事迟迟到来。in the end强调结果。有时可与口at last意义相同。 【归纳】英语中常见描述事件发生次序的用语有： ① First,....Next,....Then....Finally, ....例如:

First, we went to Leshan.Next, we climbed Mount Emei.Then we played with some moneys.Finally, towards evening we were on the way back to Chengdu.② What did you do next? 3.Thanks致谢

(2002北京) -- It's been a wonderful evening, Thank you very much. -- ____.

A.My pleasure

B.I'm glad to hear that

C.No, thanks

D.It's OK [答案与解析]A 本题考查英语中如何表达感谢及应答。My pleasure是回答感谢的客套话。 【归纳】英语中表达感谢的用语有： ① Thank you (very much).

47 ② Thanks a lot.③ Thank you for your help.④ It's very kind / nice of you.⑤ Many thanks.⑥ I appreciate your help.⑦ I can never thank you enough.⑧ I'm extremely grateful to you.应答用语有： ① It's a pleasure.② My pleasure.③ That's OK / all right.④ You're welcome.⑤ Not at all.⑥ Don't mention it.⑦ No trouble at all (没什么).⑧ At your service (愿为你效劳).⑨ Think nothing of it.[牛刀小试4] 1.-- Thank you ever so much for your help.-- ____.A.Glad to hear that

B.Not worth thanking C.Think nothing of it

D.You're too polite 2.-- How did you find your visit to the museum, Jane? -- ____.A.Oh, wonderful, indeed B.By taking a No.3 bus C.I went there alone D.A clamate of mine showed me the way 3.-- ____ the articles of Times? -- I'm not sure.I glanced through them but I haven't formed an opinion yet.A.How do you think of

B.What did you like C.How did you like

D.What do you think of 4.-- Thank you very much for the meal.-- Not at all.____.A.I'm very glad to hear that B.I'm glad you could come C.Make yourself at home D.With pleasure ☆精典题例☆

1.Generally speaking, ____ according to the directions, the drug has no side effect.(2003年上海) A.when taking

B.when taken C.when to take

D.when to be taken 【解析】选B take和drug是动宾关系，要用过去分词作状语。可看作是when it is taken的省略。 2.Unle ____ to speak，you should remain silent at the conference.(2003年春季上海) A.invited B.inviting C.being invited D.having invited 【解析】选A you与invite是动宾关系，要用过去分 词invited作状语。

3.The research is so designed that once ____ nothing can be done to change it.(NMET 2002) A.begins

B.having begun C.beginning

D.begun

48 【解析】选D once begun 在句中作状语；once这里是连词，“一旦”。

4.____ with the size of the whole earth, the biggest ocean does not seem big at all.(2004年 湖北) A.Compare

B.When comparing C.Comparing

D.When compared 【解析】选D 相当于when it is compared。

5.____ snacks and drinks, but they also brought cards for entertainment when they had a picnic in the forest.(2004年 上海) A.Not only they brought

B.Not only did they bring C.Not only brought they

D.Not only they did bring 【解析】选B not only...but also引导的并列句；以not only开头的句子要部分倒装。 6.____, he used to helped his father on the farm.A.When was a boy

B.As he was a boy C.As a boy

D.During a boy 【解析】选C

as在这里是连词；as a boy = when (he was) a boy。

Unit 1

1.词组：

add up

add up to

add„ to„

add to

calm… down

have got to

be concerned about / with

walk the dog

cheat … of

go through

go ahead

go by

set down

set up

set off

set out

a series of

on purpose

by accident/ chance

in order to

so as to

in order that

so as that

at dusk

at dawn

at midnight

at noon

face to face

no longer

not … any longer

settle down

suffer from

recover from

get/ be tired of

make a list of

list

pack… up

get along/ on with

fall in love

be grateful to sb.for sth.

join in

take part in

join

attend

make sb/ sth

+ 宾语补足语

have something/ anything/ everything /nothing to do with

49

it’s because„.. +原因

it’s why„. + 结果

dare

+

(to) do (实义动词)

do

(情态动词)

a year and a half

it’s no pleasure+ doing sth

happen to do sth

have trouble with sb (in) doing sth

exactly

find it + adj.+ to do sth

make friends with

swap … with

it is / was + 序数词 + that + has done / had done „.

unit 2

词组：

because of

come up

come up with

come in

come on

come out

actually

in fact

as a matter of fact

in reality

be based on

at present

make use of

make full/ good use of

such as

play a part/ role in

recognize … as

more than one + 谓语用单数

at the end of

in the end

at an end

voyage

tour

travel

journey

than ever before

even if / though

communicate with

those

+ 定语从句 用who

1600’s

1980s

in + 物主代词

+ 数字的复数

in his forties

the former

the latter

a number of

the number of

make sense

usage VS use

believe it or not

there is no such + 名词 （不加冠词）

the way + in which / that /省略

especially

specially

straight

adj/ adv

unit 3

50

《高一英语模板一教案.doc》

将本文的Word文档下载到电脑，方便编辑。

推荐度：

点击下载文档